26 - Culture and Social Representations  pp. 543-559


By Gerard Duveen

Image View Previous Chapter Next Chapter



The main aim of the theory of social representations is clear. By focusing on everyday communication and thinking, it hopes to determine the link between human psychology and modern social and cultural trends.

Moscovici, 1988, p. 225

Culture as a Field of Representations

Since the inception of work on social representations nearly half a century ago, there has been a persistent interest in the articulation between these representations and the broader field of culture, as Anne Parsons's (1969) pioneering studies indicate. In part, her investigations explored the forms of systematic misunderstanding that arise when expressions of mental states grounded in one specific culture are projected into a different cultural context. In one of her studies, she examines the reasons for the failure of her attempted treatment of a South Italian immigrant to the United States through a psychoanalytically based psychotherapy. In her reflections she focuses on her failures in grasping Mr. Calabrese's communicative actions, both in the sense of understanding what he was saying in relation to his own cultural context (including the specific context of being an immigrant to the United States), and in the sense of understanding how his cultural resources were being employed to make sense of what she said and did. Such forms of misunderstanding are now familiar, but they can be no less instructive for that.

26

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Albertazzi, L., Jacquette, D. & Poli, R. (Eds.) (2001). The school of Alexius Meinong. Aldershot: Ashgate.
Álvarez, A. & del Río, P. (1994). Education as Cultural Construction. Vol. 2 of Explorations in Socio-Cultural Studies. General editors James Werstch, Pablo del Río & Amelia Álvarez. Madrid: Infancia y Aprendizaje.
Anokhin, P. (1964). Systemogenesis as a general regulador of brain development. In W. A. Himwuich & H. E. Himwich. (Eds.), Progress in brain research. Vol. 9 (pp. 54–86). Amsterdam: Elsevier.
Apel, K. O. (1975). Der Denkweg von Chales S. Peirce. Eine Einführung in dem amerikanischen Pragmatismus. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag.
Bartlett, F. C. (1932). Remembering. A Study in Experimental and Social Psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Bernstein, N. (1966). Ocherki po fiziologii dvizhenia I fiziologii aktivnosti. Moscow: Meditsina.
Boesch, E. E. (1989). Cultural psychology in action-theoretical perspective. In Ç. Kagitçibasi. (Ed.), Growth and progress in cross-cultural psychology (pp. 41–51). Lisse: Swets & Zeitlinger.
Boesch, E. E. (1991). Symbolic action theory and cultural psychology. New York: Springer.
Boesch, E. E. (1993). The sound of the violin. Schweizerische Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 52(2), 70–81.
Boesch, E. E. (1997). Von der Sehnsucht. Saarbrücken: Privater vor-abdrück.
Boesch, E. E. (2005). Von Kunst bis Terror. Göttingen: Vanderhoeck & Ruprecht.
Bühler, K. (2000). Die Krise der Psychologie. Göttingen: Verbrück Wissenschaft. [Original work published in 1927]
Cavafy, C. P. (1911). Ithaka. http://srs.dl.ac.uk/people/pantos/kavafis_ithaca.html.
Chaudhary, N. (2004). Listening to culture. New Delhi: Sage.
Cole, M. (1990). Cultural psychology: A once and future discipline? In J. Berman. (Ed.), Nebraska Symposium on Motivation. Vol. 37 (pp. 279–336). Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press.
Cole, M. (1996). Cultural Psychology. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Danziger, K. (1980). The history of introspection reconsidered. Journal of the History of the Behavioral Sciences, 16, 241–262.
Danziger, K. (1985). The methodological imperative in psychology. Philosophy of the Social Sciences, 15, 1–13.
Danziger, K. (1990). Reconstructing the subject. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Danziger, K. (1997). Naming the mind. London: Sage.
Diriwächter, R. (2004). Völkerpsychologie: the synthesis that never was. Culture & Psychology, 10, 1, 85–109.
Diriwächter, R. & Valsiner, J. (Eds.) (2007). Striving towards the whole: Creating Theoretical Syntheses. New Brunswick, N.J.: Transaction Publishers.
Eckensberger, L. H. (1995). Activity or action: two different roads towards an integration of culture into psychology? Culture & Psychology, 1(1), 67–80.
Eckensberger, L. H. (1997). The legacy of Boesch's intellectual oeuvre. Culture & Psychology, 3(3), 277–298.
Eckensberger, L. H. (2003). Wanted: a contextualized psychology. In T. S. Saraswathi. (Ed.), Cross-cultural perspective in human development (pp. 70–101). New Delhi: Sage.
Ehrenfels, C. von (1988). On Gestalt qualities (1932). In B. Smith. (Ed.), Foundations of Gestalt theory (pp. 121–123). München: Philosophia Verlag.
Edwards, D. (1997). Discursive Psychology. London: Sage.
Fernández, T. R. (2005). Sobre la Historia Natural del Sujeto y su lugar en una Historia de la Ciencia. A propósito de Robert J. Richards y el Romanticismo de Darwin. Estudios de Psicología, 26(1), 67–104.
Foucault, M. de (1969/1972). The Archaeology of Knowledge. And the Discourse on Language. New York: Tavistock.
Gertz, S. H., Breaux, J.-P. & Valsiner, J. (Eds.) (2007). Semiotic rotations. Greenwich, Ct.: InfoAge Press.
Gupta, S. & Valsiner, J. (1999). Coordination of speaking and acting in the second year of life. Mind, Culture & Activity, 6(2), 143–159.
Head, H. (1926). Aphasia and kindred disorders of Speech. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Hermans, H. J. M. (1995). The limitations of logic in defining the self. Theory & Psychology, 5(3), 375–382.
Hermans, H. J. M. (1996a). Voicing the self: from information processing to dialogical interchange. Psychological Bulletin, 119(3), 31–50.
Hermans, H. J. M. (1996b). Opposites in a dialogical self: constructs as characters. Journal of Constructivist Psychology, 9(1), 1–26.
Hermans, H. (2001). The dialogical self: Toward a theory of personal and cultural Positioning. Culture and Psychology, 7(3), 243–281.
Hermans, H. J. (Ed) (2002). Special Issue on dialogical self. Theory & Psychology, 12(2), 147–280.
Hoffmeyer, J. (1997a). Biosemiotics: Towards a New Synthesis in Biology. European Journal for Semiotic Studies, 9(2), 355–376.
Hoffmeyer, J. (1997b). The swarming body. In I. Rauch and G. F. Carr. (Eds.), Semiotics around the world: Synthesis in diversity. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Houser, N. (1992). Introduction to Vol. 1. In The Essential Peirce: Selected Philosophical Writings, 1893–1913. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Innis, R. E. (2005). The signs of interpretation. Culture & Psychology, 11(4), 499–509.
Jahoda, G. (1993). Crossroads between culture and mind. Cambridge. MA: Harvard University Press.
Karkosch, K. (1935). Über die Anfänge der Lehre von der “Gestaltqualitäten”. Archiv für die gesamte Psychologie, 93, 189–233.
Kroeber, A. & Kluckhohn, C. (1952). Culture: a critical review of concepts and definitions. Papers of the Peabody Museum of American Archaeology and Ethnology, 47(1), i–viii.
Lotze, R. H. (1852). Medizinische Psychologie oder Physiologie der Seele. Leipzig. (reprinted, Amsterdam 1966).
Matsuzawa, T. (Ed.), (2001). Primate origins of human cognition and behavior. Tokyo: Springer.
Menand, L. (2001). The Metaphysical Club: A Story of Ideas in America. New York: Farrar, Straus & Giroux.
Mercer, N. & Coll, C. (1994). Teaching, Learning and Interaction. Vol. 2 of Explorations in Socio-Cultural Studies. General editors James Werstch, Pablo del Río & Amelia Álvarez. Madrid: Infancia y Aprendizaje.
Molenaar, P. C. M. (2004). A manifesto on psychology as idiographic science: Bringing the person back into scientific psychology, this time forever, Measurement: Interdisciplinary research and perspectives, 2, 201–218.
Molenaar, P. C. M. & Valsiner, J. (2005). How generalization works through the single case: A simple idiographic process analysis of an individual psychotherapy case. International Journal of Idiographic Science, 1, 1–13. [www.valsiner.com]
Moody, E., Markova, I. & Plichtova, J. (1995). Lay representations of democracy: a study in two cultures. Culture & Psychology, 1, 4, 423–453.
Moro, C. & Rodriguez, C. (1994). Prelinguistic sign mixity and flexibility in interaction. European Journal of Psychology of Education, 9, 301–310.
Moscovici, S. (1981). On social representations. In J. P. Forgas. (Ed.), Social cognition (pp. 181–209). London: Academic Press.
Moscovici, S. (1982). The coming era of representations. In J.-P. Codol & J.-P. Leyens (Eds.), Cognitive analysis of social behavior (pp. 115–150). The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff.
Nöth, W. (1998). Ecosemiotics. Töid margisüsteemide alalt/Sign System Studies, 26, 332–434.
Peirce, C. S. (1896). The regenerated logic. The Monist, 7, 1, 19–40.
Peirce, C. S. (1935). Collected papers of Charles Sanders Peirce. Vol. 6. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Peirce, C. S. (1982). Writings of Charles S. Peirce. Vol. 1, Bloomington, In.: Indiana University Press.
Riba, C. (1990). La comunicación animal. Un enfoque zoosemiótico. Barcelona: Anthropos.
Riba, C. (1995). De ayer y de hoy: Charles S. Peirce (1839-1914). Anuario de Psicología, 64, 83–89.
Richards, R. J. (1987). Darwin and the emergence of evolutionary theories of mind and behavior. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Richards, R. J. (2002). The Romantic conception of life. Science and Philosophy in the age of Goethe. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Rogoff, B. (1990). Apprenticeship in thinking. New York: Oxford University Press.
Rogoff, B. (2003). The cultural nature of human development. New York: Oxford University Press.
Rosa, A. & Valsiner, J. (Eds.) (1994). Historical and theoretical discourse. Explorations in socio-cultural studies Vol. 1 of Explorations in Socio-Cultural Studies. General editors James Werstch, Pablo del Río & Amelia Álvarez & Pablo del Río. Madrid: Infancia y Aprendizaje.
Sherif, M. (1936). Psychology of social norms. New York: Holt.
Sánchez, J. C. & Loredo, J. C. (2005). Psicologías para la evolución. Catálogo y crítica de los usos actuales de la Selección Orgánica. Estudios de Psicología 26(1), 105–126.
Shweder, R. A. (1990). Cultural psychology – what is it? In J. W. Stigler, R. A. Shweder, & G. Herdt. (Eds.), Cultural psychology (pp. 1–43). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Shweder, R. A. (1991). Thinking through cultures. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Shweder, R. A. & Sullivan, M. A. (1990). The semiotic subject of cultural psychology. In L. Pervin (Ed.), Handbook of personality (pp. 399–416). New York: Guilford Press.
Simão, L. M. & Valsiner, J. (Eds.) (2007). Otherness in Question: Labyrinths of the self. Greenwich, Ct.: Information Age Publishers.
Smith, B. (Ed.), (1988). Foundations of Gestalt theory. München: Philosophia Verlag.
Stern, W. (1911). Differentielle Psychologie. Leipzig: J. A. Barth.
Stern, W. (1935). Allgemeine Psychologie auf personalistischer Grundlage. Den Haag: Martinus Nijhoff.
Valsiner, J. (2001). The first six years: Culture's adventures in psychology. Culture & Psychology, 7, 1, 5–48.
Valsiner, J. (2005). Affektive Entwicklung im kulturellen Kontext. In J. B. Asendorpf. (Ed.), Enzyklopädie der Psychologie. Vol. 3. Soziale, emotionale und Persönlichkeitsentwicklung (pp. 677–728). Göttingen: Hogrefe.
Valsiner, J. (2006). Developmental epistemology and implications for methodology. In. R. M. Lerner (Ed.), Theoretical models of human development (pp. 166–209). Vol. 1 of Handbook of Child Psychology (W. Damon and R. M. Lerner, Eds.). 6th edition. New York: Wiley.
Valsiner, J. (2007). Culture in minds and societies. New Delhi: Sage.
Valsiner, J. & Sato, T. (2006). Historically Structured Sampling (HSS): How can psychology's methodology become tuned in to the reality of the historical nature of cultural psychology? In J. Straub, D. Weidemann, C. Kölbl & B. Zielke. (Eds.), Pursuit of meaning (pp. 215–251). Bielefeld: transcript.
Van Der Veer, R., & Valsiner, J. (1991). Understanding Vygotsky: A quest for synthesis. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
Von Uexküll, J. J. (1928). Theoretische Biologie. Berlin: Julius Springer.
Von Uexküll, J. J. (1982). The theory of meaning. Semiotica 42, 1, 25–82. (original in 1941)
Vygotsky, L. S. (1926). The Historical Meaning of the Crisis in Psychology. A Methodological Investigation. In Sobranie sochinenii, vol 1 (pp. 291–483). Moscow: Pedagogika. [English translation in In R. V. Rieber. (Ed.), The collected Works of L. S. Vygotsky. Vol. 3. Problems of the Theory and History of Psychology. New York: Plenum. 233–344.]
Wertsch, J. (1991). Voices of the mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Wertsch, J., del Río, P. & Alvarez, A. (Eds.) (1995). Sociocultural Studies of Mind. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Wertsch, J. & Ramírez, J. D. (1994). Literacy and Other Forms of Interaction. Vol. 2 of Explorations in Socio-Cultural Studies. General editors James Werstch, Pablo del Río & Amelia Álvarez. Madrid: Infancia y Aprendizaje.
Wundt, W. (1873). Grundzüge der physiologischen Psychologie. Leipzig: Engelmann.
Wundt, W. (1883). Logik. Vol. 2. Methodenlhere. Stuttgart: Enke.
Wundt, W. (1907). Logik. Vol. 3. Logik der Geisteswissenschaften (3rd Edition). Stuttgart: Enke.
Wundt, W. (1900–1920). Völkerpsychologie. 10 vols. Leipzig: Kröner-Engelmann, 1900–1910; 3rd (Ed.), 1911–1920. vol. I: Die Sprache. part I, vol. II: Die Sprache. part 2; vol. III: Die Kunst. vols. IV-VI: Mythus und Religion. vols. VII, VIII: Die Gesellschaft. vol. IX: Das Recht. vol. X: Kultur und Geschichte.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Blumenthal, A. L. (2001). A Wundt Primer. The operating characteristics of Consciousness. In Robert W. Rieber & David K. Robinson: Wilhelm Wundt in History. The Making of a Scientific Psychology. New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers.
Branco, A. U., & Valsiner, J. (1997). Changing methodologies: A co-constructivist study of goal orientations in social interactions. Psychology and Developing Societies, 9, 1, 35–64.
Brentano, F. (1924). Psychologie vom empirischen Standpunkt I. Leipzig: F. Meiner.
Cairns, R. B. (1986). Phenomena lost: issues in the study of development. In J. Valsiner (Ed.), The individual subject and scientific psychology (pp. 97–111). New York: Plenum.
Diriwächter, R. (2004). Völkerpsychologie: The synthesis that never was. Culture & Psychology, 10(1), 179–203.
Havelock, E. (1991). Oral-Literate Equation: A Formula for the Modern Mind. In D. R. Olson & N. Torrance (Eds.), Literacy and Orality (pp. 11–27). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Jahoda, G. (1993). Crossroads between culture and mind. Cambridge. MA: Harvard University Press.
Morgan, C. L. (1894). An introduction to comparative psychology. London: Walter Scott Ltd.
Olson, D. R. (1991). Literacy and Objectivity: The Rise of Modern Science. In D. R. Olson & N. Torrance (Eds.), Literacy and Orality (pp. 149–164). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Ong, W. (1982). Orality and Literacy. The Technologizing of the Word. London: Routledge.
Prigogine, I., & Stengers, I. (1984). Order out of Chaos. Man's New Dialogue with Nature. Toronto: Bantam Books.
Sherif, M. (1936). Psychology of social norms. New York: Holt.
Valsiner, J. (2000). Culture and human development. London: Sage.
Valsiner, J. (2003). Comparative methodology as the human condition: Conwy Lloyd Morgan and the use of animal models in science. From Past to Future, 4(1), 1–9.
van Geert, P. (2003). Dynamic System Approaches and Modeling of Developmental Processes. In J. Valsiner & K. Connolly (Eds.), Handbook of Developmental Psychology (pp. 640–672). London: Sage.
von Bertalanffy, L. (1950). The theory of open systems in physics and biology. Science, 111, 23–29.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Ariès, P. (1962). Centuries of childhood: A social history of family life. New York: Vintage.
Augoustinos, M. (1998). Ideology and social representations. Towards the study of ideological representations. In U. Flick (Ed.), Psychology of the social (pp. 156–169). Cambridge University Press.
Averill, J. R. (1982). Anger and aggression. New York: Springer.
Averill, J. R. (1985). The social construction of emotion: With special reference to love. In K. J. Gergen & K. E. Davies (Eds.), The social construction of the person (pp. 89–109). New York: Springer
Averill, J. R. (1990). Inner feelings, works of the flesh, the beast within, diseases of the mind, driving force, and putting on a show: six metaphors of emotion and their theoretical extensions. In D. E. Leary (Ed.), Metaphors in the history of Psychology (pp. 104–132). Cambridge University Press.
Badinter, E. (1980). The Myth of motherhood: A historical view of the maternal instinct. Tel Aviv: Maariv.
Barthes, R. (1972). Mythologies. London: Jonathan Cape.
Billig, M. (1987). Arguing and thinking: A rhetorical approach to social psychology. Cambridge University Press.
Billig, M. (1991). Ideologies and opinions. London: Sage.
Boccaccio, G. (1924). The Decameron. Translation by J. M. Rigg. London: The Navarre Society. (Italian original 1353)
Bohnsack, R., Loos, P. & Przyborski, A. (2001). ‘Male Honour’: Towards an understanding of the construction of gender relations among youths of Turkish origin. In H. Kotthoff & B. Baron (Eds.), Gender in interaction: Perspectives on femininity and masculinity in ethnography and discourse (pp. 175–207). Amsterdam: Benjamins Publishing.
Bohnsack, R. & Nohl, A. (2003). Youth culture as practical innovation: Turkish German youth, ‘Time Out’ and the actionisms of breakdance. European Journal of Cultural Studies, 6, 366–385.
Bruner, J. S. (1983). Child's talk: Learning to use language. Oxford University Press.
Bruner, J. S. (1990). Acts of meaning. Harvard University Press.
Bruner, J. S. (1993). Do we “acquire” culture or vice versa? Behavioral and Brain Science, 16(3), 515–516.
Canter, D. & Blackwell, G. (Eds.). (1993). Empirical approaches to social representations. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Castro-Tejerina, J. & Rosa, A. (2006). A socio-cultural approach on theorising about psychology. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.) Handbook of sociocultural psychology. Cambridge University Press.
Danziger, K. (1990) Generative metaphor and the history of the psychological discourse. In D. E. Leary (Ed.), Metaphors in the history of Psychology (pp. 331–356). Cambridge University Press.
de Kerckhove, D. & Lumsden, C. J. (Eds.). (1988). The alphabet and the brain. The lateralization of writing. Berlin & Heidelberg: Springer.
de Mause, L. (1974). The history of childhood. New York: The Psychohistory Press.
Doi, T. (1973). The Anatomy of Dependence. Tokyo: Kodansha International.
Doi, T. (1986). Amae: A key concept for understanding the Japanese personality structure. In T. S. Lebra & W. P. Lebra (Eds). Japanese Culture and Behavior (pp. 121–129). University of Hawaii Press.
Doi, T. (2004). Understanding Amae. The Japanese concept of need-love. Global Oriental Publisher.
Durkheim, E. (1965). The elementary forms of religious life. Translation by J. W. Swain. New York: Free Press.
Duveen, G. & Lloyd, B. (Eds.). (1990). Social representations and the development of knowledge. Cambridge University Press.
Duveen, G. (2006). Social representations. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.) Handbook of sociocultural psychology. Cambridge University Press.
Edwards, D. (1991). Categories are for talking. On the cognitive and discursive bases of categorization. Theory & Psychology, 1(4), 515–542.
Edwards, D. (1997). Discourse and cognition. London: Sage.
Edwards, D. & Potter, J. (1992). Discursive Psychology. London: Sage.
Ekman, P. (1982). Emotion in the human face. Cambridge University Press.
Ekman, P. (1989). The argument and evidence about universals in facial expressions of emotion. In H. Wagner & A. Manstead (Eds.), Handbook of social psychophysiology (pp. 143–164). Chichester: Wiley.
Farr, R. M. & Moscovici, S. (1984). Social representations. Cambridge University Press.
Fields, W. M., Segwerdahl, P. & Savahe-Rumbaugh, S. (2006). The material practices of ape language research. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Handbook of sociocultural psychology. Cambridge University Press.
Flick, U. (Ed.), (1998). Psychology of the social. Cambridge University Press.
Foucault, M. (1965). Madness and civilization. New York: Pantheon.
Foucault, M. (1970). The order of things. New York: Pantheon.
Foucault, M. (1972). The archaeology of knowledge. New York: Pantheon.
Foucault, M. (1976). Mental illness and psychology. New York: Harper & Row.
Foucault, M. (1977). Discipline and punish. New York: Pantheon.
Foucault, M. (1978). The history of sexuality. Vol. I: An introduction. New York: Pantheon.
Foucault, M. (1985). The history of sexuality. Vol. II: The use of pleasure. New York: Random House.
Foucault, M. (1986). The history of sexuality. Vol. III: The care of the self. New York: Random House.
Geertz, C. (1973). The interpretation of cultures. New York: Basic Books.
Gentner, D. & Grudin, J. (1985). The evolution of mental metaphors in psychology: A 90-year retrospective. American Psychologist, 40(2), 181–192.
Gergen, K. J. (1996). Technology and the self. In D. Grodin & T. Lindlof (Eds.), Constructing the self in a mediated world (pp. 127–140). London: Sage.
Gergen, K. J. (2000). The self: Transfiguration by technology. In D. Fee (Ed.), Pathology and the postmodern. Mental illness as discourse and experience (pp. 100–115). London: Sage.
Gibbs, R. W. (1994). The poetics of mind: figurative thought, language, and understanding. Cambridge University Press.
Giddens, A. (1990). The consequences of modernity. Cambridge University Press.
Gronemeyer, M. (1993). Das Leben als letzte Gelegenheit. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.
Harré, R. (1984). Some reflections on the concept of ‘social representations’. Social Research, 51, 927–938.
Havelock, E. A. (1963). Preface to Plato. Harvard University Press.
Havelock, E. A. (1986). The muse learns to write. Reflections on orality and literacy from antiquity to present. Yale University Press.
Hegel, G. F. W. (1949). The Phenomenology of Mind. Translated by J. B. Baillie. London: Allen & Unwin.
Heidegger, M. (1962). Being and time. Translation by J. Macquarrie & E. Robinson. New York: Harper & Row.
Heidegger, M. (1971). “… Poetically Man Dwells”. In M. Heidegger: Poetry, Language, Thought (pp. 211–229). Translation by A. Hofstadter. New York: Harper & Row.
Heidegger, M. (1977). The question concerning technology and other essays. Translation by W. Lovitt. New York: Harper & Row.
Heidegger, M. (1993). Letter on humanism. In D. F. Krell (Ed.), Martin Heidegger: Basic writings (pp. 230–245). Translation by D. F. Krell. New York: Harper & Row.
Jaynes, J. (1976). The origin of consciousness in the breakdown of the bicameral mind. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
Kovecses, Z. (1986). Metaphors of anger, pride, and love. Pragmatics and Beyond. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Lacan, J. (1977). Ecrits: A selection, Translation by A. Sheridan. London: Routledge.
Lakoff, G. (1987). Women, fire, and dangerous things. What categories reveal about the mind. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Lakoff, G. & Johnson, M. (1980). Metaphors we live by. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Latour, B. (1993). We have never been modern. Harvard University Press.
Latour, B. (2004). Politics of nature: how to bring the sciences into democracy. Translation by C. Porter. Harvard University Press.
Latour, B. & Weibel, P. (2005). Making things public. Cambridge: MIT Press.
Le Goff, J. (1984). The birth of purgatory. Translation by A. Goldhammer. Chicago: Chicago University Press.
Lutz, W. (1987). Doublespeak: From “Revenue Enhancement” to “Terminal Living”: How government, business, advertisers, and others use language to deceive you. New York: Harper & Row.
Lutz, Catherine, A. (1988). Unnatural emotions: Everyday sentiments on a micronesian atoll and their challenge to Western theory. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Luhmann, N. (1990). Essays on self-reference. Columbia University Press.
Luhmann, N. (1991). Paradigm lost: On the ethical reflection of morality. Thesis Eleven, 29, 82–94.
Marshall, H. & Wetherell, M. (1989). Talking about career and gender identities: A discourse analysis perspective. In S. Skevington & D. Baker (Eds.), The social identity of women (pp. 106–129). London: Sage.
McLuhan, M. (1962). The Gutenberg galaxy. The making of typographic man. Toronto: Toronto University Press.
McLuhan, M. (1964). Understanding media. New York: McGraw Hill.
Moscovici, S. (1988). Notes towards a description of social representation. European Journal of Social Psychology, 18, 211–250.
Moscovici, S. (2001). Social Representations: Explorations in Social Psychology. Edited by G. Duveen. New York: New York University Press.
Mühlmann, H. (1996). The nature of cultures. A blueprint for a theory of culture genetics. Vienna: Springer.
Ong, W. (1982). Orality and literacy. The technology of the word. London: Routledge.
Pinker, S. (1999). Words and rules: The ingredients of language. New York: Basic Books.
Potter, J. & Edwards, D. (1993). A model of discourse in action. American Behavioral Scientist, 36(3), 383–402.
Potter, J. & Wetherell, M. (1987). Discourse and social psychology: Beyond attitudes and behaviour. London: Sage.
Potter, J. & Wetherell, M. (1990). Discourse: Noun, verb or social practice. Philosophical Psychology, 3(2–3), 205–219.
Rheingold, H. (1988). They have a word for it. A lighthearted lexicon of untranslatable words and phrases. Los Angeles: Tarcher.
Rosch, E. (1973). Natural categories. Cognitive Psychology, 4, 328–350.
Rosch, E. (1975). Human Categories. In E. Warren (Ed.), Advances in cross-cultural psychology Vol. 1 (pp. 3–49). London: Academic Press.
Rosch, E. (1978). Principles of categorization. In E. Rosch & B. Lloyd (Eds.), Cognition and categorization (pp. 27–48). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Ruiseco, G. & Slunecko, T. (2006). The role of mythical European heritage in the construction of Colombian national identity. Journal of Language and Politics, 5(3), 359–384.
Sapir, E. (1958) [1929]. The Status of linguistics as science. In D. G. Mandelbaum (Ed.), The selected writings of Edward Sapir in language, culture, and personality (pp. 160–166). University of California Press.
Scheper-Hughes, N. (1992). Death without weeping: the violence of everyday life in Brazil. University of California Press.
Schwarz, B. (1986). The battle for human nature: Science, morality, and modern life. New York: Norton.
Scribner, S. & Cole, M. (1981). The psychology of literacy. Harvard University Press.
Sinha, D. (1998). Changing perspectives in social psychology in India: A journey towards indigenization. Asian Journal of Social Psychology, 1, 17–31.
Sloterdijk, P. (1988). Zur Welt kommen – zur Sprache kommen. Frankfurter Vorlesungen. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp.
Sloterdijk, P. (1993). Weltfremdheit. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp.
Sloterdijk, P. (2004). Sphären II. Schäume. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp.
Slunecko, T. (1999). On harvesting diversities into a dynamic directedness. International Journal of Psychotherapy, 4(2), 127–144.
Slunecko, T. (2002). Von der Konstruktion zur dynamischen Konstitution. Vienna University Press.
Slunecko, T. (2003). Reality TV und postmoderner Affekt. Ein Laborbericht. In A. Birbaumer & G. Steinhardt (Eds.), Der flexibilisierte Mensch. Subjektivität und Solidarität im Wandel (pp. 113–123). Heidelberg: Asanger.
Slunecko, T. & Hengl, S. (2006). Culture and media. A dynamic constitution. Culture & Psychology, 12(1), 69–85.
Snell, B. (1953). The discovery of the mind. Harvard University Press.
Taylor, C. (1989). Sources of the Self. The making of modern identity. Harvard University Press.
Turkle, S. (1995). Life on the screen. Identity in the age of internet. New York: Simon & Schuster.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1962). Thought and language. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Wagner, W. (1998). Social representations and beyond – brute facts, symbolic coping and domesticated worlds. Culture & Psychology, 4, 297–329.
Wagner, W., Duveen, G., Farr, R., Jovchelovitch, S., Lorenzi-Cioldi, F., Markov, I. & Rose, D. (1999). Theory and method of social representations. Asian Journal of Social Psychology, 2, 95–125.
Wagner, W., Elejabarietta, F. & Lahnsteiner, I. (1995). How the sperm dominates the ovum – objectification by metaphor in the social representation of conception. European Journal of Social Psychology, 25, 671–688.
Wagner, W. & Hayes, N. (2005). Everyday discourse and common-sense. The theory of social representation. Basingstoke: Palgrave-Macmillan Publishers.
Wetherell, M., Steven, H. & Potter, J. (1987). Unequal egalitarianism: A preliminary study of discourses concerning gender and employment opportunities. British Journal of Social Psychology, 26, 59–71.
Whorf, B. L. (1956). Language, thought and reality. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Wittgenstein, L. (1949). Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
Wittgenstein, L. (1953). Philosophical investigations, Part II. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
Yang, K. S. (1999). Towards an indigenous Chinese psychology: A selective review of methodological, theoretical, and empirical accomplishments. Chinese Journal of Psychology, 4, 181–211.
Yang, K. S. (2000). Mono-cultural and cross-cultural indigenous approaches: The royal road to the development of a balanced global psychology. Asian Journal of Social Psychology, 3, 241–263.
Yang, K. S. & Bond, M. H. (1990). Exploring implicit personality theories with indigenous or imported constructs: The Chinese case. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 58, 1087–1095.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Anderson, B. (1983). Imagined Communities. Reflections on the Origin and Spread of Nationalism. New York: Verso.
Ariès, P., & Duby, G. (Eds.). (1999). Histoire de la vie privée. 4. París: Éditions du Seuil. [A history of private life. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1987–1991]
Bakhtin, M. M. (1981). The Dialogic Imagination: Four Essays by M. M. Bakhtin. Austin: University of Texas.
Berger, P. L., & Luckmann, T. (1966). The Social Construction of Reality. New York: Doubleday.
Blanco, F. (2002). El cultivo de la mente: un ensayo teórico-crítico sobre la cultura psicológica. [The Culture of Mind: a theoretical-critical essay about psychological culture]. Madrid: Antonio Machado.
Blanco, F., & Castro, J. (1999). La descripción de la actividad epistémica de los psicólogos en los manuales de Historia de la Psicología [The Description of the Epistemic Activity of Psychologists in Handbooks of History of Psychology]. Revista de Historia de la Psicología, 20 (3–4), 59–72.
Bourdieu, P. (1991). Language and Symbolic Power. Cambridge, Ma.: Harvard University Press.
Bruner, J. (1990). Acts of Meaning. Cambridge, Ma.: Harvard University Press.
Burke, K. (1969). A Rhetoric of Motives. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Castro, J. (2004). La Psicología del pueblo español: El papel del discurso psico-sociológico en la construcción de la identidad española en torno a la crisis del 98. [The Psychology of the Spanish People: The role of psycho-sociological discourse in the construction of Spanish identity around the 1898 crisis] Doctoral Dissertation. Madrid: Universidad Autónoma de Madrid.
Castro, J., Jiménez, B., Morgade, M., & Blanco, F. (2001). La función de los mitos fundacionales en la promoción de una identidad disciplinar para la psicología [Function of Foundational Myths in Promoting of a Disciplinary Identity in Psychology]. Revista de Historia de la Psicología, 22 (3–4)., 297–309.
Cole, M. (1996). Cultural Psychology. Cambridge, Ma.: Harvard University Press.
Costa, J. (1898/1991). Reconstitución y europeización de España. En Reconstitución y europeización de España y otros escritos [Reconstitution and Europeanisation of Spain. In Reconstitution and Europeanisation of Spain and other works]. Madrid: Instituto de Estudios de Administración Local.
Daniel, U. (2001). Kompendium Kulturgeschichte, Theorien, Praxis, Schlüssselwörter. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp Verlag Frankfurt am Main [Compendium of Cultural History: Theory, Practice, Keywords].
Danziger, K. (1990). Constructing the Subject: Historical Origins of Psychological Research. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Danziger, K. (1997). Naming the Mind: How Psychology found Its Language. Londres: Sage.
Draaisma, D. (1995). De metaforenmachine – een geschiedenis van het geheugen. Groningen: Historische Uitgeverij [Metaphors of memory: a history of ideas about the mind. Cambridge, U.K.: New York: Cambridge University Press, 2000].
Elias, N. (2000). The civilizing Process. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
Engeström, Y. (1987). Learning by Expanding. Helsinki: Orienta-Konsultit.
Foucault, M. (1966). Les mots et les choses, une archéologie des sciences humanes. París: Editions Gallimard. [Alan Sheridan (tr.). The Order of Things, an Archaeology of the Human Sciences. New York: Vintage, 1970]
Foucault, M. (1971). L'Ordre du discours. París: Gallimard. [In A. M. Sheridan Smith (trans.). The Archaeology of Knowledge and the Discourse on Language. New York: Pantheon, 1972, 215–37.
Foucault, M. (1988). Technologies of the self: a seminar with Michel Foucault. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press.
Fouillé, A. (1902). L'Esquisse psychologique des peuples européens. Spanish version Bosquejo psicológico de los pueblos europeos [Psychological Sketch of European Peoples]. Buenos Aires: Americalee (1943).
Gergen, K. (1991). The Satured Self. New York: Basic Books.
Havelock, E. (1986). The Muse Learns to Write. Reflections on Orality and Literacy from Antiquity to the Present. New Haven and Londres: Yale University Press.
Hedetoft, U. (1995). Signs of Nations. Studies in the Political Semiotics of Self and Other in Contemporary European Nationalism. Aldershot: Darmouth.
Hobsbawm, E. (1983). “Introduction: The Invention of Tradition”. in E. Hobsbawn and T. Ranger (Eds.). The Invention of Tradition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 7–21.
Jahoda, G. (1992). Crossroads between Culture and Mind: Continuities and Change in Theories of Human Nature. New York: Harvester/Wheatsheaf.
Jansz, J., & Van Drunen, P. (2004). A social history of psychology. Oxford: Blackwell Publishing.
Latour, B. (1987). Science in Action. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Le Bon, G. (1895/1981). Psychologie des Foules [The Psychology of Crowds]. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France. English version in http://socserv2.socsci.mcmaster.ca/~econ/ugcm/3ll3/lebon/Crowds.pdf
Leahey, T. (2004). A History of Psychology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall.
Leary, D. (1990). Metaphors in the History of Psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Leenhardt, M. (1971). Do Kamo. La personne et le mythe dans le monde mélanésien. París: Gallimard. [Do kamo: person and myth in the Melanesian world. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979.]
Leontiev, A. (1979). Activity, Consciousness and Personality. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Lévy-Bruhl, L. (1963). L'âme primitive. París: Gallimard. [The ‘soul’ of the primitive. New York: Praeger, 1966]
Rosa, A. (1994). History of Psychology as a ground for reflexivity. In A. Rosay J. Valsiner (Eds.).: Historical and Theoretical Discourse in Social-Cultural Psychology. Madrid: Aprendizaje.
Rosa, A. (2000a). Qué añade a la psicología el adjetivo cultural? [What does the adjective ‘cultural’ add to Psychology]. Anuario de Psicología, 31 (4), 27–57.
Rosa, A. (2000b). Entre la explicación del comportamiento y el esfuerzo por el significado: una mirada al desarrollo de las relaciones entre el comportamiento individual y la cultura [Between the Explanation of Behaviour and the Effort after Meaning: a Glance at the Development of the links Between Individual Behaviour and Culture]. Revista de Historia de la Psicología, 21 (4), 77–114.
Rosa, A. (2007a). Acts of Psyche. Actuations as symthesis of semiosis and action. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.). Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 205–237). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Rosa, A. (2007b). Dramaturgical actuations and cultural artifacts: making the rationality of the world. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.). Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 293–317). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Rosa, A., Huertas, J. A., & Blanco, F. (1996). Metodología de la Historia de la Psicología [A Methodology for the History of Psychology]. Madrid: Alianza.
Rose, N. (1985). The Psychological Complex. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul.
Rose, N. (1996). Inventing Ourselves: Psychology, Power and Personhood. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Smith, A. (1991). National Identity. London: Penguin Books.
Soyland, P. (1994). Psychology as Metaphor. Londres: Sage.
Taine, H. (1863). Histoire de la littérature anglaise [History of English Literature]. Paris: L. Hachette.
Toulmin, S., & Goodfield, J. (1965). The Discovery of Time. New York: Harper & Row.
Valsiner, J., & Van Der Veer, R. (1996). Desde el gesto hasta el self: perspectivas comunes en las sociopsicologías de George Herbert Mead y Lev Vygotski [From the Gesture to the Self: Common Perspectives in the socio-psychologies of George Herbert Mead and Lev Vygotski]. In D. Páez y A. Blanco (Ed.), La teoría socio-cultural y la psicología social actual [Socio-cultural Theory and Present Social Psychology], pp. 63–74. Madrid: Aprendizaje.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1926). The Historical Meaning of the Crisis in Psychology. A Methodological Investigation. In Sobranie sochinenii, vol 1 (pp. 291–483). Moscow: Pedagogika. [English translation In R. V: Rieber (Ed.), The collected Works of L.S: Vygotsky. Vol. 3. Problems of the Theory and History of Psychology. 233–344. New York: Plenum. 1997]
Vygotsky, L. S. (1986). Thought and Language. Cambridge, MA: Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1978). Mind in Society. The Development of Higher Psychological Processes. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Wartofsky, M. (1973). Models. Dordrecht: D. Reidel.
Wertsch, J. (1991). Voices of the Mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
White, H. (1973). Metahistory. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University Press.
White, H. (1987). The Content of the Form. Baltimore: The John Hopkins University Press.
Wittgenstein, L. (1973). Philosophical investigations. New York: Macmillan.
Wundt, W. (1900–1920). Völkerpsychologie. 10 vols. Leipzig: Kröner-Engelmann, 1900–1910; 3rd (Ed.), 1911–1920. vol. I: Die Sprache. part I, vol. II: Die Sprache. part 2; vol. III: Die Kunst. vols. IV–VI: Mythus und Religion. vols. VII, VIII: Die Gesellschaft. vol. IX: Das Recht. vol. X: Kultur und Geschichte.
Wundt, W. (1916). Elements of Folk Psychology. London: Allen & Unwin.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Arakawa, A. & Takada, S. (2006). Choosing abortion and its effect on one's life based on a TEM (trajectory equifinality model) analysis. Poster for ISSBD meeting, Melbourne, Australia, July.
Baldwin, J. M. (1930). James Mark Baldwin. In C. Murchison (Ed.), A history of psychology in autobiography. Vol. 1 (pp. 1–30). New York: Russell & Russell.
Benetka, G. (1995). Psychologie in Wien: Sozial- und Theoriegeschichte des Wiener Psychologischen Instituts 1922–1938. Wien: WUV-Universitätsverlag.
Bertalanffy, L. von (1968). General systems theory. New York: Braziller.
Bergold, J. B. (2000). The Affinity between Qualitative Methods and Community Psychology [40 paragraphs]. Forum Qualitative Sozialforschung/Forum: Qualitative Social Research [On-line Journal], 1(2). Available at: http://www.qualitative-research.net/fqs-texte/2--00/2--00bergold-e.htm [Date of Access: December 25, 2005].
Brunswik, E. (1947). Systematic and representative design of psychological experiments. With results in physical and social perception. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Cairns, R. B. (1998). The making of developmental psychology. In W. Damon & R. Lerner (Eds.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 1. Theoretical models of human development (5th (Ed.), pp. 25–105). New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Cochran, W. G. (1963). Sampling Techniques, 2nd edition, New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Danziger, K. (1990). Constructing the subject: historical origins of psychological research. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Darwin, C. (1877). A biographical sketch of an infant. Mind, 2, 285–294.
Desrosières, A. (1993). Politique des grands nombres. Paris: Editions La Decouverte.
D'Onofrio, M. J., & Gendron, M. S. (2001). Technology Assisted Research Methodologies: A historical perspective of technology-based data collection methods. Paper presented at the Internet Global Summit: A Net Odyssey – Mobility and the Internet – The 11th Annual Internet Society Conference, Stockholm Sweden.
Driesch, H. (1908). The science and philosophy of theorganism. London: Adam and Charles Black.
Drunen, P. van & Jansz, J. (2004). Child-rearing and education. In J. Jansz, and P. van Drunen (Eds.), A Social History of Psychology (pp. 45–92). Malden, MA: Blackwell.
Escobar, A. (1995). Encountering development. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
Frank, A. W. (1995). The Wounded Storyteller: Body Illness, and Ethics. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Gesell, A. (1940). The first five years of life: a guide to the study of the preschool child. London: Methuen.
Glaser, B. G. & Strauss, A. L. (1967). The discovery of grounded theory: strategies for qualitative research. Chicago: Aldine.
Gigerenzer, G. & Murray, D. J. (1987). Cognition as intuitive statistics. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Günther, I. A. (1998). Contacting subjects: the untold story. Culture & Psychology, 4, 65–74.
Hammond, K. R. (1948). Subject and object sampling-A note. Psychological Bulletin, 45, 530–533.
Hermans, H. J. M. (2001). The dialogical self: Toward a theory of personal and cultural positioning. Culture and Psychology, 7, 243–281.
Hermans, H. J. M. (Ed.), (2002). Special issue on dialogical self. Theory and Psychology, 12, 147–280.
Kawakita, J. (1986). The KJ Method: Seeking Order Out of Chaos (In Japanese). Tokyo: Chuokoron-sha.
Kido, A. (2006). The TEM (trajectory equifinality model) of the transition of cosmetic use by Japanese women in the United States. Poster for ISSBD Australia.
Leary, D. (1982). Immanuel Kant and the development of modern psychiatry. In W. R. Woodward and M. G. Ash. (Eds.), The problematic science: psychology in nineteenth-century thought. (pp. 17–42) New York: Praeger.
Latour, B. (1986). Science in Action. Philadelphia: Open University Press.
Marks, E. (1947). Selective sampling in psychological research. Psychological Bulletin, 44, 267–275.
McNemar, Q. (1940). Sampling in psychological research. Psychological Bulletin, 37, 331–365.
Molenaar, P. C. M. (2004). A manifesto on psychology as idiographic science: Bringing the person back into scientific psychology, this time forever. Measurement: Interdisciplinary Research and Perspectives, 2, 201–218.
Molenaar, P. C. M., & Valsiner, J. (2005). How generalization works through the single case: A simple idiographic process analysis of an individual psychotherapy case. International Journal of Idiographic Science, 1, 1–13. [www.valsiner.com]
Nerlich, B. (2004). Coming full (hermeneutic) circle: The controversy about psychological methods. In Z. Todd, B. Nerlich, S. McKeown, and D. D. Clarke (Eds.), Mixing Methods in Psychology – The Integration of Qualitative and Quantitative Methods in Theory and Practice (pp. 17–36). London: Routledge.
Neyman, J. (1934). On the two different aspects of the representative method: the method of stratified sampling and the method of purposive selection. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, 97, 558–606.
Patton, M. Q. (2002). Qualitative research and evaluation methods (3rd. Ed.). Thousand Oakes, CA: Sage Publications, Inc.
Peirce, C. S. (1957). The Principal Lessons of the History of Science. In Essays in the philosophy of Science. Indianapolis [original paper from 1896]
Preyer, W. T. (1882). Die Seele des Kindes. Leipzig: Grieben.
Radaev, V. V. (2005). Ekonomicheskaya sotsiologia [Economic sociology]. Moscow: Izdatel'skii Dom GU-VShE.
Sato, T. Yasuda, Y., & Kido, A.(2004). Historically structured sampling (HSS) model: A contribution from cultural psychology. Paper presented at the 28th International Congress of Psychology, Beijing, China, August 12.
Sato, T., & Valsiner, J. (2006). Historically Structured Sampling (HSS) and Trajectory Equifinality Model (TEM); New methodologies for cultural historical approach. Poster symposium for ISSBD, Melbourne, Australia, July.
Sen, A. (1992). Inequality Reexamined. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
Simon, H. (1999). Karl Duncker and cognitive science. From Past to Future, 1, 2, 1–11.
Smith, T. M. F. (1976). The foundations of survey sampling: A review. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, Series A, 139:183–204.
Valsiner, J. (1984). Two alternative epistemological frameworks in psychology: The typological and variational modes of thinking. Journal of Mind and Behavior, 5, 449–470.
Valsiner, J. (Ed.), (1986). The individual subject and scientific psychology. New York: Plenum.
Valsiner, J. (1989). Human development and culture: The social nature of personality and its study. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books.
Valsiner, J. (1997). Culture and the development of children's action, 2nd (Ed.) New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Valsiner, J. (2000). Culture and human development. London: Sage.
Valsiner, J. (2001). Comparative study of human cultural development. Madrid: Fundacion Infancia y Aprendizaje.
Valsiner, J. (2003a). Culture and its Transfer: Ways of Creating General Knowledge Through the Study of Cultural Particulars. In W. J. Lonner, D. L. Dinnel, S. A. Hayes, & D. N. Sattler. (Eds.), Online Readings in Psychology and Culture (Unit 2, Chapter 12), (http://www.wwu.edu/~culture), Center for Cross-Cultural Research, Western Washington University, Bellingham, Washington, USA.
Valsiner, J. (2003b). Beyond social representations: A theory of enablement. Papers on Social representations, 12, 7.1–7.16 [http://www.psr.jku.at/]
Valsiner, J. (2004). Three years later: Between social positioning and producing new knowledge. Culture & Psychology, 10, 5–27.
Valsiner, J. (2005). Transformations and flexible forms: Where qualitative psychology begins. Qualitative Research in Psychology, 4, 39–54.
Valsiner, J. (2006). Developmental epistemology and implications for methodology. In R. Lerner (Ed.), Handbook of Child Psychology. Vol. 1. Theoretical models of human development (pp. 166–209). New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Valsiner, J. (2007). Culture in minds and societies. New Delhi: Sage.
Valsiner, J. & Connolly, K. J. (Eds.), (2003). Handbook of developmental psychology. London: Sage.
Valsiner, J. & Diriwächter, R. (2005). Qualitative Forschungsmethoden in historischen und epistemologischen Kontexten. In G. Mey. (Ed.), Handbuch Qualitative Entwicklungspsychologie (pp. 35–5). Köln: Kölner Studien Verlag.
Valsiner, J. & Sato, T. (2006). Historically Structured Sampling (HSS): How can psychology's methodology become tuned in to the reality of the historical nature of cultural psychology? In J. Straub, D. Weidemann, C. Kölbl & B. Zielke. (Eds.), Pursuit of meaning (pp. 215–251). Bielefeld: transcript.
Van Der Veer, R. & Valsiner, J. (1994). The Vygotsky reader. Oxford: Blackwell.
Wirth, U. (1997). Abduction and comic in the sign of the three: Peirce, Freud, Eco. In I. Rauch and G. F. Carr. (Eds.), Semiotics around the World: Synthesis in diversity (pp. 895–898). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Wozniak, R. H. 1998 Classics in psychology, 1855–1914: Historical Essays. Bristol: Thoemmes Press.
Wundt, W. (1897). Outlines of Psychology. Translated by C. H. Judd. Leipzig: Wilhelm Engelmann; first published in German as Wundt, W. (1896). Grundriss der Psychologie. Leipzig: Wilhelm Engelmann.
Yasuda, Y. (2005). Self-reassessment Following Infertility: Branching Selection by Couples unable to have Children after Infertility Treatment. Qualitative Research in Psychology, 4, 201–226. [In Japanese with English abstract.]
Yasuda, Y. (2006). A trial to describe the diversity of infertility treatments with development of the Trajectory Equifinality Model (TEM). Poster presentation for ISSBD Australia, July.
Yin, R. K. (2003). Case Study Research: Design and Methods. Thousand Oaks, Ca.: Sage.
Yule, G. U. (1929). Introduction to the Theory of Statistics, 9th (Ed.) London: C. Griffin.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Bentley, A. F. (1938). Physicists and fairies. Philosophy of Science, 5, 132–165.
Bickhard, M. H., & Terveen, L. (1995). Foundational issues in artificial intelligence and cognitive science: Impasse and solution. Amsterdam: Elsevier Scientific.
Billig, M. (1997). Discursive, rhetorical, and ideological messages. In C. McGarty & S. A. Haslam (Eds.), The message of social psychology: Perspectives on mind in society (pp. 36–53). Oxford: Blackwell.
Borghi, A. M. (2005). Object concepts and action. In D. Pecher, & R. A. Zwaan (Eds.), Grounding cognition: The role of perception and action in memory, language, and thinking (pp. 8–34). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Bowker, Geoffrey C., & Leigh Star, Susan. (2000). Sorting things out: Classification and its consequences. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Brewer, Marilyn, & Hewstone, Miles. (2004). Introduction. In M. Brewer & M. Hewstone (Eds.), Social cognition (pp. ⅺ–ⅻ). Oxford: Blackwell.
Carr, Harvey A. (1915). Review of J. B. Watson (1914). Behavior: an introduction to comparative psychology. Psychological Bulletin, 12, 308–312
Connelly, J., & Costall, A. (2000). R. G. Collingwood and the idea of an historical psychology. Theory & Psychology, 10, 147–170.
Costall, A. (1988). A closer look at direct perception. In A. Gellatly, D. Rogers & J. A. Sloboda (Eds.), Cognition and Social Worlds (pp. 10–21). Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Costall, A. (1990). Picture perception as ‘indirect’ perception. In K. Landwehr (Ed.), Ecological Perception Research, Visual Communication And Aesthetics (pp. 15–22). New York: Springer-Verlag.
Costall, A. (1991). Graceful degradation: Cognitivism and the metaphors of the computer. In A. Still. & A. Costall (Eds.), Against cognitivism (pp. 151–170). London: Harvester-Wheatsheaf.
Costall, A. (1995). Socializing affordances. Theory and Psychology, 5, 467–481.
Costall, A. (2004). From Darwin to Watson (and Cognitivism) and back again: the principle of animal-environment mutuality. Behavior & Philosophy, 32, 179–195.
Costall, A. (2006a). ‘Introspectionism’ and the mythical origins of scientific psychology. Consciousness and Cognition, 15, 634–654.
Costall, A. (2006b). On being the right size: Affordances and the question of scale. In G. Lock & B. Molyneaux (Eds.), Confronting scale in archaeology: Issues of theory and practice (pp. 15–26). New York: Springer.
Costall, A. (In press). Bringing the body back to life: James Gibson's ecology of agency. In J. Zlatev, T. Ziemke, R. Frank, & R. Dirven (Eds.), Body, language and mind: Vol. 1: Embodiment. The Hague: de Gruyter.
Costall, A., Leudar, I., & Reddy, V. (2006). Failing to see the irony in ‘mind-reading.’ Theory & Psychology, 16, 163–167.
Costall, A. P., & Still, A. W. (1989). James Gibson's theory of direct perception and the problem of cultural relativism. Journal for the Theory of Social Behaviour, 19, 433–441.
Costall, A., & Dreier, O. (2006). Doing things with things: The design and use of objects. London: Ashgate.
Cronon, W. (Ed.), (1996). Uncommon ground: rethinking the human place in nature. New York: W.W. Norton.
Danziger, K. (1997). The varieties of social construction. Theory & Psychology, 7, 399–416.
Dewey, J. (1958). Experience and nature. New York: Dover. [Based on the Paul Carus lectures of 1925.]
Dewey, J. (1910). The influence of Darwin on philosophy. In J. Dewey, The influence of Darwin on philosophy and other essays (pp. 1–19). New York: Henry Holt & Co. [First published in Popular Science Monthly, July, 1909.]
Dewey, J. (1914/1977). Psychological doctrine and philosophical teaching. In S. Morgenbesser (Ed.), Dewey and his critics (pp. 439–445). New York: Journal of Philosophy, Inc. [First published in the Journal of Philosophy Psychology and Scientific Methods, 1914, 11(19).]
Dewey, J. (1969). The quest for certainty. New York.
Duncker, K. (1947). Phenomenology and epistemology of consciousness of objects. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research, 7, 505–542.
Edwards, D. (1995). A commentary on discursive and cultural psychology. Culture and Psychology, 1, 55–65.
Ellen, R. (1996). Introduction. In Roy Ellen and Katsuyoshi Fukui (Eds.), Redefining Nature: Ecology, Culture and Domestication (pp. 1–36). Oxford: Berg.
Falmagne, Rachel Joffe. (1995). The abstract and the concrete. In L. M. W. Martin, K. Nelson, & E. Tobach (Eds.), Sociocultural psychology: Theory and practice of doing and knowing (pp. 205–228). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Fodor, J. A. (1981). Representations. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Funder, D. C. (1995). On the accuracy of personality judgment: A realistic approach. Psychological Review, 102, 652–70.
Geertz, C. (1975). The interpretation of cultures. New York: Basic Books.
Gibson, J. J. (1950). The implications of learning theory for social psychology. In J. G. Miller (Ed.), Experiments in social process. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Gibson, J. J. (1979). The ecological approach to visual perception. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
Gregory, R. L. (1989). Dismantling reality. In H. Lawson & L. Appignanesi (Eds.), Dismantling truth: reality in the post-modern world (pp. 93–100). London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson.
Hall, Stuart. (1997a). Introduction. In Stuart Hall (Ed.), Representation: Cultural representations and signifying practices (pp. 1–11). London: Sage.
Hall, Stuart. (1997b). The work of representation. In Stuart Hall (Ed.), Representation: Cultural representations and signifying practices (pp. 13–64). London: Sage.
Hammond, H., & Keat, R. (1991). Understanding phenomenology. Oxford: Blackwell.
Harnad, S. (1990). The symbol grounding problem. Physica D, 42, 335–346.
Harré, Rom. (2002). Cognitive science: A philosophical introduction. London: Sage.
Heft, H. (2001). Ecological psychology in context: James Gibson, Roger Barker, and the legacy of William James's radical empiricism. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Heidbreder, E. (1933). Seven psychologies. New York: Century.
Hirsch, Paul D. (2000). Beyond discipline: toward effective partnerships between conservation biologists and ecological anthropologists. Unpublished manuscript, Department of Ecology, University of Georgia.
Holt, E. B., Marvin, W. T., Montague, W. P., Perry, R. B., Pitkin, W. B. & Spaulding, E. G. (1912). The new realism: Cooperative studies in philosophy. New York: MacMillan.
Holt, E. B. (1914). The concept of consciousness. London: George Allen & Co.
Hutchby, Ian. (2001). Technologies, texts and affordances. Sociology, 35, 441–456.
Ingold, T. (2000). The perception of the environment: essays in livelihood, dwelling and skill. London: Routledge.
Janlert, L. E. (1987). Modeling change: the frame problem. In Z. W. Pylyshyn (Ed.), The robot's dilemma: The frame problem in artificial intelligence. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
Joerges, B. (1988). Technology in everyday life: Conceptual queries. Journal for the Theory of Social Behaviour, 18, 221–237.
Johnson-Laird, P. (1988). The computer and the mind.Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press.
Joravsky, D. (1989). Russian psychology: a critical history. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
Kessen, W. (1981). Early settlements in New Cognition. Cognition, 10, 167–171.
Kwa, C. (1987). Representations of nature mediating between ecology and science policy: The case of the International Biological Programme. Social Studies of Science, 17, 413–42.
Leeper, Robert. (1951). Cognitive processes. In S. S. Stevens (Ed.), Handbook of experimental psychology (pp. 730–757). New York: Wiley.
Leslie, A. (1987). Pretense and representation: The origins of ‘theory of mind’. Psychological Review, 94, 412–426.
Leudar, I., & Costall, A. (Eds.), (2004a). Special issue: Theory of mind. Theory & Psychology, 14(5), 571–752.
Leudar, I., & Costall, A. (2004b). On the persistence of the ‘problem of other minds’ in psychology: Chomsky, Grice and ‘theory of mind’. Theory and Psychology, 14, 603–623.
Lovejoy, Arthur O. (1929). The revolt against dualism: An inquiry concerning the existence of ideas. LaSalle, ILL: Open Court. Danziger, K. (1997). The varieties of social construction. Theory & Psychology, 7, 399–416.
MacMurray, J. (1961). Persons in relation. London: Faber & Faber.
Marshall, H. H. (1996). Clarifying and implementing contemporary psychological perspectives. Educational Psychologist, 31, 29–34.
Mead, George Herbert. (1934). Mind, self, and society. Chicago: Chicago University Press.
Mead, George Herbert. (1938). The philosophy of the act. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Mead, Margaret. (1975). Visual anthropology in a discipline of words. In Paul Hoskins (Ed.), Principles of visual anthropology (pp. 3–10). The Hague, Netherlands: Mouton Publishers.
Miller, G. A., Pribram, K., & Galanter, E. (1960). Plans and the structure of behavior. New York: Holt.
Pecher, D., & Zwaan, R. A.(Eds.), Grounding cognition: The role of perception and action in memory, language, and thinking. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Pylyshyn, Z. (1986). Computation and cognition. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Reed, E. S. (1988). James J. Gibson and the psychology of perception.New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
Ryle, G. (1999). Reason. Linacre Journal, No. 3, 71–84.
Schiffer, M. B. (with A. R. Miller). (1999). The Material Life of Human Beings: Artifacts, Behavior, and Communication. London: Routledge.
Shalin, Dmitri N. (1993). Modernity, postmodernism, and pragmatist inquiry: An introduction. Symbolic Interaction, 16, 303–332.
Shaw, R. E. (2003). The agent-environment interface: Simon's indirect or Gibson's direct coupling. Ecological Psychology, 15, 37–106.
Shweder, R. A., & Sullivan, M. A. (1990). The semiotic subject of cultural psychology. In L. A. Previn (Ed.), Handbook of personality: Theory and research. New York: Guilford Press.
Smith, E. R., & MacKie, D. M. (2000). Social psychology, 2nd ed. London: Psychology Press.
Sperber, D. (1996). Explaining culture: A naturalistic approach. Oxford: Blackwell.
Stevens, S. (Ed.), (1997). Conservation through cultural survival: indigenous peoples and protected areas. Washington, DC: Island Press.
Still, A., & Costall, A. (1991a). The mutual elimination of dualism in Vygotsky and Gibson. In A. Still. & A. Costall (Eds.), Against cognitivism. (pp. 225–236). London: Harvester-Wheatsheaf.
Still, A. W., & Costall, A. (Eds.), (1991b). Against cognitivism. London: Harvester Press.
Taylor, S. E., Peplau, L. A., & Sears, D. O. (1994). Social psychology, 8th edition. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Thomas, Julian (1999). Some problems with the notion of external symbolic storage, and the case of neolithic material culture in Britain. In Colin Renfrew, & Chris Scarre (Eds.), Cognition and material culture. Oxford: McDonald Institute Monographs.
Tomasello, M., & Call, J. (1997). Primate cognition. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Tooby, J. & Cosmides, L. (1995). Foreword. In S. Baron-Cohen, Mindblindness: An essay on autism and theory of mind (pp. ⅸ–ⅹⅷ). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Toulmin, Stephen. (1976). Knowing and acting: An invitation to philosophy. New York: Macmillan.
Wertsch, J. V. (1996) The role of abstract rationality in Vygotsky's image of mind. In A. Tryphon & J. Voneche. (Eds.), Piaget-Vygotsky: The social genesis of thought (pp. 25–43). Hove, East Sussex, UK: Psychology Press.
Wilcox, S., & Katz, S. (1984). Can indirect realism be demonstrated in the psychological laboratory? Philosophy of the Social Sciences, 1984, 149–157.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Amazeen, E., & Turvey, M. T. (1996). Weight perception and the haptic size-weight illusion are functions of the inertia tensor. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human Perception and Performance, 22, 213–232.
Bernstein, N. A. (1967). The Coordination and Regulation of Movements. Oxford: Pergamon Press.
Blanco, F. (1995). Cognition as a black box: The blind date of mind and culture. Culture & Psychology, 1, 203–213.
Carello, C., & Turvey, M. T. (2000). Rotational dynamics and dynamic touch. In M. Heller (Ed.): Touch, representation, and blindness (pp. 27–66). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Cole, M., & Griffin, P. (1983). A Socio-historical Approach to Re-mediation. The Quarterly Newsletter of the Laboratory of Comparative Human Cognition, 5(4), 69–74.
Costall, A. (1995). Socializing affordances. Theory and Psychology, 5(4) 457–481.
Feigenberg, J. M. (1998). The Model of the Future in Motor Control. In M. L. Latash (Ed.): Progress in Motor Control. Bernstein's Traditions in Movement Studies (pp. 89–103). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Fodor, J. A. (1975). The Language of Thought. New York: Crowell.
Frawley, W. (1997). Vygotsky and Cognitive Science. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Gibson, J. J. (1966). The Senses considered as Perceptual Systems. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
Gibson, J. J. (1979). The ecological approach to visual perception. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Heller, M. A., & Schiff, W. (1991). The Psychology of Touch. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Katz,(1925/1989). The world of touch. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Kelso, J. A. S. (1981). On the Oscillatory Basis of Movement. Bulletin of the Psychonomic Society, 18, 63.
Kelso, J. A. S. (1994). Elementary coordination dynamics. In P. Swinnen, H. Heuer, J. Massion, & P. Casae (Eds.): Interlimb coordination: Neural, Dynamical, and Cognitive Constraints (pp. 301–318). New York: Academic Press.
Kelso, J. A. S. (1995). Dynamic Patterns. The Self-Organization of Brain and Behavior. Cambridge: MIT Press.
Kelso, J. A. S. (1998). From Bernstein's Physiology of Activity to Coordination Dynamics. In: M. L. Latash (Ed.): Progress in Motor Control. Bernstein's Traditions in Movement Studies (pp. 203–219). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Kelso, J. A. S., DelColle, & Shöner, G. (1990). Action-Perception as a Pattern Formation Process. In M. Jeannerod (Ed.): Attention and Performance XIII (pp. 139–169). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Latash, M. L. (1998). Progress in Motor Control. Bernstein's Traditions in Movement Studies. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Lawrence, J. A., & Valsiner, J. (1993). Conceptual Roots of Internalization: From Transmission to Transformation. Human Development, 36, 150–167.
Lee, D. N. (1976). A theory of visual control of braking based on information about time-to-collision. Perception, 5, 437–459.
Lee, D. (1998). Guiding movement by coupling taus. Ecological Psychology, 10, 221–250.
Lee, D., & Reddish, P. E. (1981). Plummeting gannets: A paradigm of ecological optics. Nature, 293, 293–294.
Leontiev, A. N. (1979). The problem of activity in psychology. In J. Wertsch (Ed.): The problem of activity in soviet psychology. New York: M. E. Sharpe.
Luria, A. R. (1979a). El cerebro en acción. Barcelona: Fontanella.
Luria, A. R. (1979b). The making of the mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Marr, D. (1982). Vision. San Francisco: Freeman Publishers.
Maturana, H., & Mpodozis, J. (1996) Percepción: configuración conductual el objeto. En H. Maturana (Ed.): Desde la biología a la psicología (pp. 27–66). Santiago de Chile: Editorial Universitaria.
Maturana, H., & Varela, F. (1984). Elárbol del conocimiento: las bases biológicas del conocimiento humano. Santiago de Chile: Editorial Universitaria.
McGraw, M. B. (1945). The neuromuscular maturation of the human infant. New York: Columbia University Press.
Merleau-Ponty, M. (1957). Fenomenología de la percepción. México: FCE.
Nam-Gyoon, K., & Turvey, M. T. (1998). Optical flow fields and Berrnstein's “Modeling of the Future”. In M. L. Latash (Ed.): Progress in Motor Control. Bernstein's Traditions in Movement Studies (pp. 221–265). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Pagano, C. C., & Turvey, M. T. (1995). The inertia tensor as a basis for the perception of limb orientation. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human Perception and Performance, 21, 1070–1087.
Port, R. F., & Van Gelder, T. (1995). Mind as Motion. Explorations in the Dynamics of Cognition. Cambridge: MIT Press.
Rodríguez, C. (2006). This volume.
Rogers, S., & Effken, J. (2003). Studies in Perception and Action VII. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Rosa, A., Huertas, J. A., & Blanco, F. (1993). Psicología de la ceguera y psicología general. In A. Rosa & E. Ochaita (eds.), Psicología de la ceguera (pp. 319–361). Madrid: Alianza Editorial.
Rosa, A., & Ochaita, E. (1993). Puede hablarse de una psicología de la ceguera?. In A. Rosa & E. Ochaita (Eds.), Psicología de la ceguera (pp. 1–18). Madrid: Alianza Editorial.
Schiff, W., & Foulke, E. (Eds.), (1982). Tactual perception: A source book. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Thelen, E. (1984). Learning to walk: Ecological demands and phylogenetic constraints. In L. P. Lipsitt (Ed.), Advances in infancy research (vol. 3) (pp. 213–150). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
Thelen, E. (1995). Time-scale dynamics and the development of an embodied cognition. In R. F. Port & T. Van Gelder (Eds.): Mind as Motion. Explorations in the Dynamics of Cognition (pp. 69–100). Cambridge: MIT Press.
Thelen, E., & Fisher, D. M. (1982). Newborn stepping: An explanation for a “disappearing reflex”. Developmental Psychology, 18, 760–775.
Thelen, E., & Smith, L. B. (1994). A Dynamic Systems Approach to the Development of Cognition and Action. Cambridge: MIT Press.
Turvey, M. T. (1994). From Borelli (1680) and Bell (1826) to the dynamics of action and perception. Journal of Sport and Exercise Psychology, 16, 128–157.
Turvey, M. T. (1996). Dynamic touch. American Psychologist, 51, 1134–1152
Turvey, M. T., & Carello, C. (1995). Some Dynamical Themes in Perception and Action. In R. F. Port & T. Van Gelder (Eds.): Mind as Motion. Explorations in the Dynamics of Cognition (pp. 372–401). Cambridge: MIT Press.
Valsiner, J. (1992). Further reflections on Jim Wertsch's Commentary “Internalization: Do we really need it? Unpublished via e-mail network XLCHC, August, 22, 1992.
Valsiner, J. (1997). Culture and the Development of Children's action. New York: John Wiley.
Valsiner, J. (2000). Culture and Human Development. London: Sage.
Van Geert, P. (1994). Dynamic systems of development. Human Development, 37, 346–365.
Van Geert, P. (1995). Growth Dynamics in Development. In R. F. Port & T. van Gelder (Eds.), Mind as Motion. Explorations in the Dynamics of Cognition (pp. 313–337). Cambridge: MIT Press.
Van Geert, P. (2003). Dynamic Systems Approaches and Modeling of Developmental Proceses. In J. Valsiner & K. Connolly (Ed.), Handbook of Developmental Psychology (pp. 640–672). London: Sage.
Vigotsky, L. S. (1979). El desarrollo de las funciones psicológicas superiores. Barcelona: Crítica.
Vigotsky, L. S. (1982). Sobre los sistemas psicológicos. In L. S. Vigotsky: Obras escogidas, Vol. I. Madrid: MEC-Visor, 1991.
Wertsch, J. V. (1991). Voices of the Mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Altmann, S. A., (Ed.), (1967). Social Communication among Primates. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Bates, E. (1993). Comprehension and Production in Early Language Development. Monographs of the SRCD, 58: Nos. 3–4.
Bateson, G. (1955/1972). A Theory of Play and Fantasy. In G. Bateson. Steps to an Ecology of Mind. New York: Ballantine.
Bruner, J. (1972). The Nature and Uses of Immaturity. American Psychologist, 27: 1–22.
Bruner, J. (1974/1975). From Communication to Language. A Psychological Perspective. Cognition, 3: 255–87.
Byrne, R. W. & Whiten, A., (Eds.), (1988). Machiavellian Intelligence. Oxford University Press.
Cheney, D. L. & Seyfart, R. M. (1990). How Monkeys See the World. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Cherry, C. (1957). On Human Communication. Cambridge, MA: M.I.T. Press.
Clark, R. A. (1978). The Transition from Action to Gesture. In A. Lock., (Ed.), Action, Gesture and Symbol. London: Academic Press.
Dawkins, R. & Krebs, J. R. (1978). Animal signals: Information or Manipulation?. In J. R. Krebs & N. B. Davies, (Eds.), Behavioural Ecology. An Evolutionary Approach. Oxford: Blackwell.
De Waal, F. (1982). Chimpanzee Politics. Baltimore: The John Hopkins University Press.
Deacon, T. W. (1997). The Symbolic Species. New York: Norton.
Donald, M. (1991). Origins of Modern Mind. Cambridge MA: Harvard University Press.
Dunbar, R. (1996). Grooming, gossip and the evolution of language. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Fossey, D. (1982). Gorillas in The Mist. London: Hodder & Stoughton.
Gomez, J. C. (1989). La comunicación y la manipulación de objetos en crías de gorila. Estudios de Psicología, 38: 11–128.
Green, S. & Marler, P. (1979). The Analysis of Animal Communication. In P. Marler & J. G. Vanderberg (Eds.), Handbook of Behavioral Neurobiology, Vol 3. Social Behavior and Communication. New York: Plenum Press.
Guildford, T. & Dawkins, M. S. (1991). Receiver Psychology and the Evolution of Animal Signals, Animal Behavior, 42: 1–14.
Hauser, H. D. (1996). The Evolution of Communication. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Hinde, R. A. (1981). Animal Signals: Ethological and Games Theory are not Incompatible. Animal Behavior. 29:535–42.
Hodos, W. & Campbell, C. B. G. (1969). Scala Nature: Why is no Theory in Comparative Psychology. Psychological Review, 76: 337–50.
Hodos, W. & Campbell, C. B. G. (1990). Evolutionary Scales and Comparative Studies of Animal Cognition. In R. P. Kesner & D. S. Olton, (Eds.), Neurobiology of Comparative Cognition. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Hoffmeyer, J. (1997). The global semiosphere. In Rauch, I. & Carr, G. F. (Eds.), Semiotics around the world. Vol 2. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Humphrey, N. K. (1976). The Social Function of Intellect. In P. P. G. Bateson & R. A. Hinde, (Eds.), Growing Points in Ethology.Cambridge University Press.
Jerison, H. J. (1973). Evolution of the Brain and Intelligence. New York: Academic Press.
Kull, K. (2001). Jacob von Uexküll: an introduction. Semiotica, 134: 1–59.
Kummer, H. (1968). Social Organization of Hamadryas Baboons. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
MacKay, D. M. (1972). Formal Analysis of Communicative Processes. In R. A. Hinde, (Ed.), Non Verbal Communication. Cambridge University Press.
Marshall, J. C. (1970). The Biology of Communication in Man and Animals. In J. Lyons, (Ed.), New Horizons in Linguistics. Penguin Books.
Menzel, E. (1974). A Group of Chimpanzees in a 1-acre Field: Leadership and Communication. Repr. In R. W. Byrne, & A. Whiten, (Eds.), 1988. Machiavellian Intelligence.Oxford University Press.
Mithen, S. (1996). The Prehistory of Mind. London: Thames & Hudson.
Morris, D. (1957). ‘Typical Intensity’ and its Relation to the Problem of Ritualisation. Behaviour, 11: 1–12.
Nöth, W. (1990). Handbook of Semiotics. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Nöth, W. (1998). Ecosemiotics. Signs System Studies, 26: 332–343.
Perinat, A. (1986). La Comunicación Preverbal. Barcelona: Avesta.
Perinat, A. (1993). Comunicación Animal, Comunicación Humana. Madrid: Siglo XⅪ.
Perinat, A. (1995a). Prolegómenos para una Teoría del Juego y del Símbolo. Cognitiva, 7: 185–256.
Perinat, A. (1995b). ‘Juguemos a llamar por teléfono’. Juego Simbólico y Procesos Recursivos en la Interacción Comunicativa. Substratum, 3: 77–102.
Perinat, A. (2001). Psicología del Desarrollo. Un Enfoque Sistémico. Barcelona: Ediuoc.
Perinat, A. y Dalmau, A. (1988). La Comunicación entre Pequeños Gorilas y sus Cuidadoras. Estudios de Psicología, 33–34: 11–29.
Premack, D. (1988). “Does the Chimpanzee have a Theory of Mind” Revisited. In R. W. Byrne, & A. Whiten, (Eds.), Machiavellian Intelligence. Oxford University Press.
Ristau, C. (1991). Cognitive Ethology: the Minds of other Animals. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Savage-Rumbaugh, S., Murphy, J., Sevcic, R. A., Brakke, K. E., Williams, S. L., and Rumbaugh, D. M. (1993). Language comprehension in ape and child. Monographs of the SRCD, 58: Nos. 3–4.
Sebeok, T. A. (1968). Animal Communication. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Sebeok, T. A. (1972). Perspectives in Zoosemiotics. Paris: Mouton
Sebeok, T. A. (1977). How Animals Communicate. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Sebeok, T. A. (2001). Biosemiotics: its roots, proliferation and prospects. Semiotica, 134: 61–78.
Sjölander, S. (1997). On the Evolution of Reality – Some Biological Prerequisites and Evolutionary Stages. Journal of Theoretical Biology, 187: 595–600.
Smith, W. J. (1977). The Behaviour of Communicating: An Ethological Approach. Cambridge MA: Harvard University Press.
Struhsaker, T. T. (1967). Auditory Communication among Vervet Monkeys (Cercopitecus aethiops). In S. T. Altmann, (Ed.), Social Communication among Primates. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Tinbergen, N. (1951). The Study of Instinct. Oxford University Press.
Tomasello, M. & Call, J. (1997). Primate Cognition. Oxford University Press.
Trevarthen, C. (1984). Emotions in Infancy: Regulators of Contact and Relationships with Persons. In K. Sherer & P. Ekman, (Eds.), Approaches to Emotion. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Uetz, G. W. & Roberts, J. A. (2002). Multisensory Cues and Multimodal Communication in Spiders. Brain, Behavior and Evolution, 59: 222–230.
Van Hooff, J. A. R. A. M. (1972). A Comparative Approach to the Phylogeny of Laughter and Smiling. In R. A. Hinde, (Ed.), Non Verbal Communication. Cambridge University Press.
Von Frisch, K. (1954). The Danzing bees: An account of the Life and Senses of the Honey Bee. London: Methuen.
Von Hofsten, C. (1986). The Emergence of Manual Skills. In M. G. Wade & T. A. Whiting, (Eds.), Motor Development in Children. The Hague: Nijhoff Publ.
Von Uexküll, J. (1956). Mondes animaux, monde humain. Paris: Gonthier.
Whiten, A. (1994). Grades of Mindreading. In C. Lewis & P. Mitchell, (Eds.), Children's early Understanding of Mind. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Wilson, E. O. (1975). Sociobiology. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Bickerton, D. (1990). Language and Species. Chicago and London: The University of Chicago Press.
Bickerton, D. (1995). Language and Human Behavior. Seattle: University of Washington Press.
Benjamin, L. and Bruce, D. (1982). From Bottlefed Chimp to Bottlenose Dolphin: a contemporary appraisal of Winthrop Kellogg. The Psychological Record 32, 461–482.
Bonner, J. T. (1980). The Evolution of Culture in Animals. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Boyd, R. and Richerson, P. H. (1985). Culture and the Evolutionary Process. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Bruner, J. (1983). Child's Talk. Learning to Use Language. New York and London: W. W. Norton & Company.
Calvin, W. (2004). A Brief History of the Mind. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Chomsky, N. (1957). Syntactic Structures. The Hague: Mouton.
Chomsky, N. (1959). Review of Verbal Behavior by B. F. Skinner. Language 35: 26–58.
Darwin, C. (1859). The Origin of Species. London: John Murray.
Dawkins, R. (1976). The Selfish Gene. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Denzin, Norman K. (1997). Do Unto Others: In defense of the new writing. Taboo Vol. 1.
Donald, M. (2001). A Mind So Rare. The Evolution of Human Consciousness. New York and London: W. W. Norton and Company.
Fitch, W. T. and Hauser, M. D. (2004). Computational Constraints on Syntactic Processing in a Nonhuman Primate. Science 303, 377–380.
Fouts, R. S. and Fouts, D. H. (1989). Loulis in conversation with cross-fostered chimpanzees. In Gardner, R. A., Gardner, B. T. and von Cantfort (Eds.), (1973) Teaching Sign Language to Chimpanzees. Albany: State University of New York Press.
Fox, R. G. and King, B. J. (Eds.), (2002). Anthropology Beyond Culture. Oxford and New York: Berg.
Gardner, R. A. and Gardner, B. T. (1969). Teaching Sign Language to a Chimpanzee. Science 165, 664–672.
Gardner, R. A. and Gardner, B. T. (1971). Two-way communication with an infant chimpanzee. In A. Schrier, and F. Stollinitz (Eds.), Behavior of Nonhuman Primates (vol 4, pp. 117–184).
Guinet, C. and Bouvier, J. (1995). Development of Intentional Stranding Hunting Techniques in Killer Whale (Orcinus orca) Calves at Crozet Archipelago. Canadian Journal of Zoology 73, 27–33.
Hauser, M. D., Chomsky, N., and Fitch, W. T. (2002). The Faculty of Language: What Is It, Who Has It, and How Did It Evolve? Science 298, 1569–1579.
Hayes, K. J. and Hayes, C. H. (1951). The Intellectual Development of a Home-Raised Chimpanzee. Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 95, 105–109.
Hirata, S., Myowa, M., and Matsuzawa, T. (1998). Use of Leaves as Cushions to Sit on Wet Ground by Wild Chimpanzees. American Journal of Primatology 44, 215–220.
Hockett, C. F. (1963). The Problem of Universals in Language. In: Greenberg, J. H. (Ed.), Universals of Language. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Kellogg, W. N. (1931). Humanizing the Ape. Psychological Review 38, 160–176.
Kellogg, W. N. (2002). The Ape and The Child: A Research Project Conducted At Orange Park Florida (1931–1932). Retrieved December 15, 2005 http://www.psy.fsu.edu/historywnk/ape.html
Kellogg, W. N. and Kellogg, L. A. (1993) The Ape and The Child: A Research Project Conducted At Orange Park Florida (1931–1932). New York: Whittlesay House.
Pinker, S. (1994). The Language Instinct. New York: William Morrow.
Miles, L. H. (1983). Apes and Language: The Search for Communication Competence. In Language and Primates: Perspectives and Implications edited by J. de Luce and H. T. Wilder. (Springer-Verlag), New York. 43–61.
Murphy, R. (1986). Culture and Social Anthropology: An Overture. 2nd (Ed.), Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Patterson, F. G. (1978). The Gestures of a Gorilla: Sign Language Acquisition in Another Pongid Species. Brain And Language 572–97
Premack, D. (1986). Gavagai! Or the future history of the animal language controversy. Cambridge: MIT Press.
Premack, D. (1971a). Language in Chimpanzee? Science 172: 808–822.
Premack, D. (1971b). On the assessment of language competence in the chimpanzee. In A. M. Schrier and F. Sollnitz. (eds). Behavior of Nonhuman Primates. (Vol 4, pp. 808-822)
Rumbaugh, D. M. (1977). Language Learning by a Chimpanzee: the LANA Project. New York: Academic Press.
Rumbaugh, D. M. (2003). Intelligence of Apes and Other Rational Beings. New Haven: Yale University Press.
Rumbaugh, D. M., von Glaserfeid, E. C., Warner, H., Pisani, P., Gill, T. V., Brown, J. V., Bell, C. L., Exploring the Language Skills of Lana the Chimpanzee. International Journal of Symbolology 4, 1–9.
Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S. (1986). Ape Language: From Conditioned Response to Symbol. New York: Columbia University Press.
Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S., Fields, W. M., and Taglialatela, J. (2000). Ape Consciousness-Human Consciousness: A Perspective Informed by Language and Culture. American Zoologist 40, 910–921.
Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S., Fields, W. M., and Taglialatela, J. (2001). Language, Speech, Tools and Writing. A Cultural Imperative. Journal of Consciousness Studies 8, 273–292.
Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S., Murphy, J., Sevcic, R. A., Brakke, K. E., Williams, S. L., and Rumbaugh, D. M.,(1993). Language Comprehension in Ape and Child. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, serial no. 233, 58(3–4).
Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S., Shanker, S. G., and Taylor, T. J. (1998). Apes, Language and the Human Mind. Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press.
Segerdahl, P. (2003). Conversation Analysis as Rigorous Science. In: Prevignano, C. L. and Thibault, P. J. (Eds). Discussing Conversation Analysis. The Work of Emanuel A. Schegloff. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: J. Benjamins.
Segerdahl, P., Fields, W., and S. Savage-Rumbaugh. (2005). Kanzi's Primal Language. London: Palgrave/Macmillan.
Shanker, S. G. (1994). Ape Language in a New Light. Language and Communication 14, 59–85.
Shanker, S. G. (2001). What Children Know When They Know What a Name Is. Current Anthropology 42, 481–513.
Shanker, S. G. (2002). The Generativist-Interactionist Debate Over Specific Language Impairment: Psycholinguistics at a Crossroads. American Journal of Psychology 115, 415–450.
Shanker, S. G. and King, B. J. (2002). The Emergence of a New Paradigm in Ape Language Research. Behavioral and Brain Sciences 25, 605–656.
Squires, P. C. (1927). ‘Wolf Children’ of India. American Journal of Psychology 38, 313–315.
Taglialatela, J. P. & Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S. (2000). Vocalization production and usage in language-competent, captive bonobos, (Pan paniscus).” [abstract] American Journal of Primatology 51 (Supplement 1), 95.
Taglialatela, J. P., Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S., and Baker, L. A. (2003). Vocal Production by a Language-Competent Pan paniscus. International Journal of Primatology 24, 1–17.
Taylor, T. J. (1992). Mutual Misunderstanding. Scepticism and the Theorizing of Language and Interpretation. Durham and London: Duke University Press.
Taylor, T. J. (1994). The Anthropomorphic and the Sceptical. Language and Communication 14: 115–127.
Terrace, H. S. (1979). Nim. New York: Knopf.
Terrace, H. S., Petitto, L. A., Sanders, R. J., and Bever, T. G. (1979). Can an Ape Create a Sentence? Science 206, 891–902.
Tomasello, M. (1994). Can an Ape Understand a Sentence? A Review of Language Comprehension in Ape and Child by E. S. Savage-Rumbaugh et al. Language and Communication 14, 377–390.
Tomasello, M. (1999). The Cultural Origins of Human Cognition. Cambridge, MA, and London, England: Harvard University Press.
Toth, N., Schick, K., Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S., Sevcik, R., and Rumbaugh, D. (1993). Pan the Tool-Maker: Investigations into Stone Tool-Making and Tool-Using Capabilities of a Bonobo (Pan paniscus). Journal of Archeological Science 20, 81–91.
Toth, N., Schick, K., and Semaw, S. (2003). A Comparative Study of the Stone Tool-Making Skills of Pan, Australopithecus, and Homo sapiens. In: Toth, N. and Schick, K. (Eds.), The Oldowan: Case Studies into the Earliest Stone Age. Bloomington, Indiana: CRAFT Press.
Valsiner, J. (1994). Cultural and Human Development: A co-constructionist perspective. Annals of Theoretical Psychology 10.
Valsiner, J. and Van Der Veer, R. (2000) The Social Mind: Construction of the Idea. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Valsiner, J. (Ed.), (2005). Heinz Werner and developmental science. New York: Kluwer Scientific/Plenum.
Valsiner, J. (2005). Transformation and lexible forms: where qualitative psychology begins. Qualitative Research IN Psychology 4(4), 39–57.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1962). Thought and Language. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1978). Mind and Society. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1994). Social Development Theory. Retreived December 15, 2005 http://tip.psychology.org/vygotsky.html
Wertsch, J., del Rio, P. and Alvarez, A. (1996). Sociocultural Studies; history, action and mediation, in J. Wertsch, P. del Rio & A. Alvarez (Eds.), Sociocultural Studies of Mind. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Whiten, A., Goodall, J., McGrew, W. C., Nishida, T., Reynolds, V., Sugiyama, Y., Tutin, C. E. G., Wrangham, R. W., and Boesch, C. (1999). Cultures in Chimpanzees. Nature 399, 682–685.
Whorf, B. L. (1956). Language, Thought, and Reality: Selected Writings of Benjamin Lee Whorf. edited and with an introduction by J. B. Carroll, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Wilson, Robert, A. (1999) Preface: Philosophy. In R. A. Wilson and C. K. Frank, (Eds.), The MIT Encyclopedia of Cognitive Science (pp. ⅹⅴ–ⅹⅹⅹⅶ). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Asfaw, B., White, T., Lovejoy, O., Latimer, B., Simpson, S., & Suwa, G. (1999). Australopithecus garhi: A new species of early hominid from Ethiopia, Science, 284, 629–635.
BackweIl, L. R. & d'Errico, F. (2001). Evidence of termite foraging by Swartkrans early hominids. PNAS, 98(4), 1358–1363.
Bellomo, R. V. (1994). Methods of determining early hominid behavioral activities associated with the controlled use of fire at Fx Jj 20 Main, Koobi Fora, Kenya. Journal of Human Evolution, 27, 173–195.
Bert, J., Ayats, H., Martino, A. & Collomb, H. (1967). Le sommeil nocturne chez le babouin Papio papio: Observations en milieu natural et données eléctrophysiologiques. Folia Primatologica, 6, 28–43.
Clarke, D. L. (1984). Arqueología Analítica. Barcelona: Ediciones Bellaterra.
Coppens, Y. (1982). Qui fit quoi. Bulletin de la Société Préhistorique Française, 79(6), 163–165.
Diamond, S., & Belasco, B. (1980). De la cultura primitiva a la cultura moderna. Barcelona: Editorial Anagrama.
Escobar, M. & García, C. (1997). La importancia de la mano y de la manipulación en la adaptación de los primates. In F. Peláez & J. Veà, Etología. Bases biológicas de la conducta animal y humana (pp. 317–346). Madrid: Ediciones Pirámide.
Goodall, J. (1986). The chimpanzees of Gombe. Patterns of behavior. Cambridge: Belknapp Press of Harvard University Press.
Harris, M. (1996). Antropología cultural. Madrid: Alianza Editorial.
de Heinzelin, J., Clark, J. D., White, T., Hart, W., Renne, P., WoldeGabriel, G., Beyene, Y., & Vrba, E. (1999). Environment and behavior of 2.5-Million-Year-Old Bouri Hominids. Science, 284, 625–628.
James, S. R. (1996). Early hominid use of fire: recent approaches and methods for evaluation of the evidence. In O. Bar Yosef, L. L. Cavallidr Sforza, R. J. March & M. Piperno (Eds.), The Lower and Middle Palaeolithic (Colloquium IX of XIII International Congress of Prehistoric and Protohistoric Sciences) (pp. 65–75). Forli: Abaco.
Kano, T. (1992). The last ape. Pigmy chimpanzee behaviour and ecology.Stanford: Stanford University Press.
Klein, R. G. (1989). The Human Career. Human biological and cultural origins.Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Leakey, L. S. B. (1959). A new fossil skull from Olduvai. Nature, 184, 491–493.
Leakey, L. S. B., Tobias, P. V., & Napier, J. R. (1964). A new species of the genus Homo from Olduvai. Nature 202, 7–9.
Lockwood, C. A. & Tobias, P. V. (1999). A large male hominid cranium from Sterkfontein, South Africa, and the status of Australopithecus africanus. Journal of Human Evolution, 36, 637–685.
Nishida, T. (1980). The leaf-clipping display: a newly-discovered expressive gesture in wild chimpanzees. Journal of Human Evolution, 9, 117–128.
Mosterín, J. (1993). Filosofía de la Cultura. Madrid: Alianza Editorial.
Pickford, M. & Senut, B. (2001). The geological and faunal context of Late Miocene hominid remains from Lukeino, Kenya. C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, Sciences de la Terre et des planètes, 322, 145–152.
Sabater Pi, J. (1974). An elementary industry of the chimpanzees in the Okorobikó Mountains, Río Muni (Republic of Equatorial Guinea), West Africa. Primates, 15(4), 351–364.
Sabater Pi, J. (1978). El chimpancé y los orígenes de la cultura. Barcelona: Anthropos.
Sabater Pi, J., Veà, J. J., & Serrallonga, J. (1997). Did the first hominids build nests?Current Anthropology, 38(5), 914–916.
Sabater Pi, J., Veà, J. J. & Serrallonga, J. (2003). Nesting behavior in African hominids of plio-pleistocene: a multidisciplinary approach. In J. J. Veà, J. Serrallonga, D. Turbón, J. M. Fullola & D. Serrat (Eds.), Primates: Origin, Evolution, Behavior. Barcelona: Parc Científic de Barcelona. 82–90.
Schick, K. D., Toth, N., Garufi, G., Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S., Rumbaugh, D. & Sevcik, R. (1999). Continuing investigations into the stone tool-making and tool-using capabilities of a Bonobo (Pan paniscus). Journal of Archaeological Science, 26, 821–832.
Serrallonga, J. (1994). Homo faber, el fin de un mito. Etología y Prehistoria, una aproximación al Presente para reconstruir el Pasado del útil. Pyrenae, 25, 31–49.
Serrallonga, J. (2001). Los Guardianes del Lago. Diario de un arqueólogo en la tierra de los maasai. Barcelona: Mondadori.
Serrallonga, J. (2005). No estamos solos: chimpancés y australopitecos habilidosos. In F. Guillén (Ed.), Existo, luego pienso. Los primates y la evolución de la inteligencia humana (pp. 171–251). Madrid: Ateles.
Serrallonga, J., Sabater-Pi J., & Veà J. J. (1998). Nest building behavior in the australopithecines and early Homo. A new interdisciplinary hypothesis (ecology, ethoprimatology, paleoanthropology, archaeology and physiology). Dual Congress 1998. Johannesburg: University of the Witwatersrand.
Serrallonga, J., Gay, B. & Medina, V. (2005). ‘Pan erectus’ Project: preliminary results on occasional bipedality in captive chimpanzees (Pan t. troglodytes) and their importance for the study of the origin of bipedalism in forest areas. Folia Primatologica, 76, 64–64.
Serrallonga, J., Medina, V., & Galbany, J. (2005). Paleoecological reconstruction of Homo erectus and Paranthropus boisei through the study of living and fossil specimens of the genus Papio, Tanzania, East Africa, Folia Primatologica, 76, 64–65.
Sillen, A. (1992). Strontium-calcium ratios (Sr/Ca) of Australopithecus robustus and associated fauna from Swartkrans, Journal of Human Evolution, 23, 495–516.
Sillen, A., Hall, G., & Armstrong, R. (1995). Strontium calcium ratios (Sr/Ca) and strontium isotopic ratios (87Sr/86Sr) of Australopithecus robustus and Homo sp. from Swartkrans, Journal of Human Evolution, 28, 277–285.
Susman, R. L. (1998). Hand function and tool behavior in early hominids. Journal of Human Evolution, 35, 23–46.
Tobias, P. V. (1984). Dart, Taung and the Missing Link. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press.
Tobias, P. V. (1997). Orígenes evolutivos de la lengua hablada. In C. J. Cela Conde, R. Gutiérrez Lombardo, & J. Martínez Contreras, (Eds.), Senderos de la evolución humana. México: Ludus Vitalis, special number 1, 35–52.
Toth, N., Schick, K. D., Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S., Sevzik, R. A., & Rumbaugh, D. M. (1993). Pan the Tool-Maker: Investigations into the stone tool-making and tool-using capabilities of a Bonobo (Pan paniscus). Journal of Archaeological Science, 20, 81–91.
deWaal, F. (2002). El Simio y el aprendiz de sushi. Barcelona: Paidós.
deWaal, F. & Lanting, F. (1997). Bonobo, the forgotten ape. Berkeley, Los Angeles & London: University of California Press.
Whiten, A., Goodall, J., McGrew, W. C., Nishida, T., Reynolds, V., Sugiyama, Y., Tutin, C. E. G., Wrangham, R. W. & Boesch, C. (1999). Cultures in chimpanzees, Nature, 399, 682–685.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Apel, K. O. (1975/1997). Der Denkweg von Charles S. Peirce. Ein Einführung in den americanischen Pragmatismus. Frankfurt am Mein: Suhrkamp. Spanish versión: El camino del pensamiento de Charles S. Peirce. Madrid: Visor, 1997.
Baldwin, J. M. (1906). Thought and Things: A study of the development and meaning of thought, or genetic logic: Vol. I. Functional Logic, or genetic theory of knowledge. London: Swan Sonnenschein.
von Bertalanffy, L. (1950). The theory of open systems in physics and biology. Science, 111, 23–29.
Brentano, F. (1874). Psychologie von Empirische Standpunkte. Leipzig: Dunker und Humbolt.
Castañares, W. (2002). Sign and Representation in Semiotic Theories. Estudios de Psicología, 23(3) 339–358.
Cole, M., Engeström, Y., & Vasquez, O. (1997). Mind, Culture and Activity. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Darwin, C. (1872). The expression of Emotions in Animals and Man. Spanish version by Tomás R. Fernández: La expresión de las emociones en los animales y el hombre. Madrid: Alianza (1984).
Edelman, G. M. & Tononi, G. (2000). The Universe of Consciousness. How matter becomes Imagination. New York: Basic Books.
Emmeche, C. (1998). Defining life as a semiotic phenomenon. Cybernetics and Human Knowing 5 (1), 3–17.
Español, S. (2007). Alive Movement in Symbol Formation. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.): Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 238–256). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Fernández, T. R. (2005). Sobre la Historia Natural del Sujeto y su lugar en una Historia de la Ciencia. A propósito de Robert J. Richards y el Romanticismo de Darwin. Estudios de Psicología 26(1), 67–104.
Fuentes, J. B., Quiroga, E., & Muñoz, F. (2005). Una primera aproximación a las posibilidades de desarrollo de la teoría del origen trófico del conocimiento de Ramón Turró. Revista de Historia de la Psicología 26 (2–3), 181–189.
Gibson, J. J. (1979). The ecological approach to visual perception. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
González, Antonio (1997). Estructuras de la praxis. Ensayo de una filosofía primera. Madrid: Trotta
Gottdiener, M., Boklund-Lagapoulou, K., & Lagopoulos, A. (2002–03). Semiotics. London: Sage.
Hoffmeyer, J. (1997). Biosemiotics: Towards a New Synthesis in Biology. European Journal for Semiotic Studies, 9(2) 355–376.
Hoffmeyer, J. (2001). Life and reference. Biosystems 60, 123–130.
James, W. (1907). Pragmatism. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1979.
Kull, K. (2001). Jakob von Uexküll: An Introduction. Semiotica 134, 1–43.
Leont'ev, A. N. (1978). Activity, consciousness, and personality. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Liszka, J. J. (1996). A General Introduction to the Semeiotic of Charles Saunders Peirce. Bloomington & Indianapolis: Indiana University Press.
Luria, A. R. (1974). El cerebro en acción. Barcelona: Fontanella.
Maturana, H. R., & Varela, F. J. (1987). The Tree of Knowledge: The Biological Roots of Human Understanding. Boston: Shambhala.
Peirce, C. S. (1931–1958). Collected Papers of Charles Sanders Peirce (8 vols.). Charles Hartshorne, Paul Weiss, and Arthur Burks (Eds.), Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Peirce, C. S. (1967). Annotated Catalogue of the Papers of Charles S. Peirce. Richard S. Robin (Ed.), Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press.
Peirce, C. S. Semiotic and Significs: The Correspondence between Charles S. Peirce and Victoria Lady Welby. C. S. Hardwick (Ed.), Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Perinat, A. (2007). Comparative development of communication. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.): Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Putnam, H. (1981). Reason, Truth and History. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Riba, C. (1990). La comunicación animal. Un enfoque zoosemiótico. Barcelona: Anthropos.
Richards, R. J. (1987). Darwin and the emergence of evolutionary theories of mind and behavior. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Richards, R. J. (2002). The Romantic conception of life. Science and Philosophy in the age of Goethe. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Rivière, A. & Sotillo, M. (1999). Comunicazione, sospensione e semiosi umana: Le origini della patrica e della comprensione interpersonale. Metis 1, 45–72. Spanish versión “Comunicación, suspensión y semiosis humana: Los orígenes de la práctica y de la comprensión interpersonales”. En Angel Rivière: Obras Escogidas (vol. 3). Metarrepresentación y semiosis. Madrid: Editorial Médica Panamericana (2003).
Rodríguez, C. (2007). Object use, communication and signs: The triadic basis of early cognitive development. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Rosa, A. (2007). Dramaturgical actuations and cultural artifacts: making the rationality of the world. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology. (pp. 293–317). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Rosa, A. & Valsiner, J. (2007). General Conclusions. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology. (pp. 692–707). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Rosetti-Ferreira, M. C., Amorim, K. S., & Silva, A. P. S. (2007). Development through Social Matrix of Meaning. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.): Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology. (pp. 279–292). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Saussure, F. (1959). Course in general Linguistics. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Sebeok, T. A. (1963). Communication in Animals and Men. Language 39, 448–466.
Sebeok, T. A. (1976). Contribution to the doctrine of signs. Bloomington IN: Indiana University Press.
Shank, R. C. & Abelson, R. P. (1977). Scripts, Plans, Goals, and Understanding. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Sheriff, J. K. (1989). The Fate of Meaning. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Travieso, D. (2007). Functional systems of perception-action and re-mediation. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.): Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology. (pp. 124–139). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Turró, R. (1916). Orígenes del conocimiento. El hambre. Barcelona: Minerva.
Valsiner, J. (1984). Construction of the zone of proximal development in adult-child joint-action: The socialization of meals. New Directions for Child Development 23, 65–76.
Valsiner, J. (1987). Culture and the Development of Children's Actions. New York: John Wiley & Sons (2nd Edition, 1997).
Valsiner, J. (2005). Soziale, emotionale Entwicklungsaufgaben im kulturallen Kontext. In Enzyklpädie der Psychologie (Vol. 3). Soziale, emotionale und Persönlichkeitsentwicklung. Göttingen: Hogrefe.
Valsiner, J. & Rosa, A. (2007a). Introduction: Social-Cultural Research: Culture, Society, and Psychology. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.): Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 1–20). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Valsiner, J. & Rosa, A. (2007b). The Myth and Beyond: Ontology of Psyche and Epistemology of Psychology. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.). Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 23–39). New York: Cambridge University Press (pp.)
Vygotsky, L. S. (1931/1995). Historia del Desarrollo de las Funciones Psíquicas Superiores. In L. S. Vygotsky: Obras escogidas (Vol. III). Madrid: Aprendizaje/Visor. (pp. 11–340).
Wertsch, J. V. (1991). Voices of the Mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Wertsch, J. V. (1998). Mind as Action. New York: Oxford University Press.
Wundt, W. (1896). Outlines of Psychology. New York: G. E. Strecher.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Baron-Cohen, S. (1991). Precursors to a theory of mind: Understanding attention in others. In A. Whiten (Ed.), Natural Theories of Mind: Evolution, Development and Simulation of Everyday Mindreading (pp. 233–225). Oxford: Blackwell.
Bates, E. (1979) (Ed.), The emergence of symbols: Cognition and communication in infancy (pp. 69–140). New York: Academic Press.
Bruner, J. (1990). Acts of meaning. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Byrne, R. W. (1995). The thinking ape. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Clark, R. A. (1978). The transition from action to gesture. In A. Lock (Ed.), Action, gesture and symbol: The emergence of language (pp. 231–257). London: Academic Press.
Cross, I. (2000). Music in human evolution. In S. O'Neill (Ed.), Abstracts of the Sixth International Conference on Music Perception and Cognition. Keele – UK. 180.
Cross, I. (2003). Music and biocultural evolution. In M. Clayton, T. Herbert and R. Middleton (Eds.), The cultural study of music: A critical introduction (pp. 19–30). New York and London: Routledge.
Dissanayake, E. (2000a). Antecedents of the temporal arts in early mother-infant interaction. In N. L. Wallin, B. Merker and S. Brown (Eds.), The origins of music (pp. 389–410). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.
Dissanayake, E. (2000b). Art and intimacy: How the arts began. Seattle: University of Washington Press.
Ekman, P., & Oster, H. (1979). Facial expressions of emotion. Annual Review of Psychology, 30, 527–554.
Español, S. (2001). Creación de símbolos y ficción durante el segundo año de vida [Symbols and Fiction in the second year of life]. Estudios de Psicología 22 (2), 207–226.
Español, S. (2004). Cómo hacer cosas sin palabras. Gesto y ficción en la infancia temprana [How to do things without words. Gestures and Fiction in early infancy]. Madrid: Antonio Machado.
Español, S. (2005). Ontogénesis de la experiencia estética. La actitud contemplativa y las artes temporales en la infancia. [Ontogenesis of aesthetic experience: Contemplative attitude and temporal arts in infancy] Estudios de Psicología, 26 (2), 139–171.
Español, S., & Rivière A. (2000). Gestos comunicativos y contextos interpersonales: Un estudio con niños de 10 a 16 meses [Communicative gestures and interpersonal contexts: A study with 10 to 16 months old infants]. Estudios de Psicología 65–66, 225–245.
Español, S, Valdez, D., Gómez, E., Jiménez, M., Martínez, A., Cevasco, M., & Pérez Vilar, P. (2003). Casos de sustitución en el juego de ficción [Case-studies of substitution in pretend play]. Memorias de las X Jornadas de Investigación. Facultad de Psicología. Universidad de Buenos Aires. II 129–131.
Fassbender, C. (1996). Infants' auditory sensitivity towards acoustic parameters of speech and music. In I. Deliège & J. Sloboda (Eds.), Musical beginnings: Origins and development of musical competence (pp. 56–87). New York: Oxford University Press.
Fernández, T. R., Sánchez, J. C., Aivar, P., & J. C. Loredo (2003). Representación y significado en psicología cognitiva: una reflexión constructivista [Representation and meaning in cognitive psychology: a constructivist reflection]. Estudios de Psicología, 24 (1) 5–32.
Gómez, J. C. (1998). Do concepts of intersubjectivity apply to non-human primates? In S. Bråten (Ed.), Intersubjective communication and emotion in early ontogeny (pp. 245–259). Cambridge: University Press.
Gómez, J. C., & Martín-Andrade, B. (2002). Possible precursors of pretend play in non pretend action of captive gorillas. In R. W. Mitchell (Ed.), Pretending and imagination in animals and children. (pp. 255–268). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Gratier, M. (1999/2000). Expressions of belonging: Effect of acculturation on the rhythm and harmony of mother-infant vocal interaction. Musicæ Scientiæ, Special Issue, 93–122.
Hobson, R. P. (1993). Autism and the development of mind. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Imberty, M. (1997). Formes de la répétition et formes des affects du tems dans léxpression musicale. [Forms of repetition and forms of affects of time in musical expresion]. Musicæ Scientiæ, 1 (1), 33–62.
Imberty, M. (2000). The question of innate competencies in musical communication. In N. L. Wallin, B. Merkerdr y S. Brown (Eds.), The Origins of Music (pp. 449–462). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Imberty, M. (2002). La musica e il bambino. [Music and the child] En J. J. Nattiez (Dir.), Enciclopedia della Musica (pp. 477–495). Torino: Giulio Einaudi Editore.
Iverson, M., Capirci, O., & Caselli, M. (1994). From communication to language in two modalities. Cognitive Development, 9, 23–43.
Izard, C. E. (1979). The maximally discriminative facial movement coding system. Newark, DE: University of Delaware Instructional Resource Center.
Johnson, C. O., Clinton, D. N., Fahrman, M., Mazzaglia, G., Novak, S., & Soerhus, K. (2001). How do mothers signal shared feeling-states to their infants? An investigation of affect attunement and imitation during the first year of life. Scandinavian Journal of Psychology, 42, (4) 377–381.
Karousou, A. (2003). Análisis de las vocalizaciones tempranas: Su patrón evolutivo y su función determinante en la emergencia de la palabra [Análisis of early vocalisations: developmental patterns and their function in the emergence of the word]. Doctoral Dissertation. Universidad Complutense de Madrid.
Kavanaugh, R. (2002). Caregiver-child social pretend play: what transpires? In R. W. Mitchell (Ed.), Pretending and imagination in animals and children (pp. 91–101). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Kugiumutzakis, G. (1998). Neonatal imitation in the intersubjective companion space. In S. Brâten (Ed.), Intersubjective communication and emotion in early ontogeny (pp. 63–88). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Leslie, A. M. (1987). Pretense and representation: the origins of “theory of mind”. Psychological Review, 94, 412–26.
Lillard, A. (1993). Pretend play skills and the child's theory of mind. Child Development, 64, 348–71.
Lock, A. (1978). The emergence of language. In A. Lock (Ed.), Action, gesture and symbol: The emergence of language (pp. 3–18). London: Academic Press.
Maratos, O. (1998). Neonatal, early and later imitation: Same order phenomena? In F. Simion and G. Butterworth (Eds.), The development of sensory, motor and cognitive capacities in early infancy: From perception to cognition (pp. 145–160). East Sussex: Psychology Press.
Mc Cune-Nicolich, L. (1977). Beyond sensorimotor intelligence: Assessment of symbolic maturity through analysis pretend play. Merrill-Palmer Quaterly, 23, 89–99.
Mc Cune, L., & Agayoff, J. (2002). Pretending as representation: A developmental and comparative view. In R. W. Mitchell (Ed.), Pretending and imagination in animals and children (pp. 43–55). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Meltzoff, A. N., & Moore, M. K. (1998). Infant intersubjectivity: Broadening the dialogue to include imitation, identity and intention. In S. Brâten (Ed.), Intersubjective communication and emotion in early ontogeny (pp. 47–62). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Merker, B. (2002). Principles of interactive behavioral timing. In C. Stevens, D. Burham, G. McPherson, E. Schubert and J. Renwick (Eds.), Proceedings of the 7th International Conference of Music Perception and Cognition. Sydney: University of Western Sydney. 149–152.
Murray, L., & Trevarthen, C. (1984). Emotional regulation of interactions between two-month-olds and their mothers. In T. Field y N. Fox (Eds.), Social perception in infants (pp. 177–197). Norwood, NJ: Albex.
Papôusek, M. (1996). Intuitive parenting: a hidden source of musical stimulation in infancy. In I. Deliege y J. Sloboda. (Eds.), Musical beginnings. Origins and development of musical competence (88–112). Oxford: Oxford University
Piaget, J. (1936). La naissance de l'intelligence chez l'enfant. [The origins of intelligence in children] París: Delachaux et Niestlé.
Piaget, J. (1945/1962). Play, dreams and imitation in childhood [Trans. C. Gattegno & F. M. Hodgson]. New York: Norton. (Original work: J. Piaget (1945). La formation du symbole chez l'enfant.)
Pouthas, V. (1996). The development of the perception of time and temporal regulation of action in infants and children. In I. Deliege and J. Sloboda (Eds.), Musical beginnings. Origins and development of musical competence (pp. 115–141). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Repp, B. H. (1993). Music as motion: A synopsis of Alexander Truslit's (1938) ‘Gestaltung und Bewegung in der Musik’, Psychology of Music, 21/1, 48–72.
Ricoeur, P. (1983). Time and narrative. Chicago. University of Chicago Press.
Rivière, A. (1984/2003). Acción e interacción en el origen del símbolo. [Action and interaction in the origin of symbol] En M. Belinchón, A. Rosa, M. Sotillo & I. Marichalar (comp.) Ángel Rivière. Obras Escogidas, Vol II, pp. 77–108 Madrid: Panamericana.
Rivière, A. (1986/2003). Interacción precoz. Una perspectiva vygotskiana a partir de los esquemas de Piaget. [Early interaction. A vygotskian perspective from Piaget's schemas]. En M. Belinchón, A. Rosa, M. Sotillo & I. Marichalar (comp.) Ángel Rivière. Obras Escogidas, Vol II, pp. 109–142. Madrid: Panamericana.
Rivière, A. (1990). Origen y desarrollo de la función simbólica en el niño. [Origin and development of the symbolic funtion in the child] En J. Palacios, A. Marchesi & C. Coll (Comps.), Desarrollo psicológico y educación (pp. 113–130). Madrid: Alianza.
Rivière, A. (1997/2003). Teoría de la mente y metarrepresentación. [Theory of mind and metarrepresentation] En M. Belinchón, A. Rosa, M. Sotillo & I. Marichalar (comp.) Ángel Rivière. Obras Escogidas, Vol I, pp. 191–231. Madrid: Panamericana
Rosa, A., & Travieso, D. (2002). El tiempo del reloj y el tiempo de la acción. Introducción al número monogrfico sobre Tiempo y Explicación Psicológica [A time for the clock and a time for action. Introduction to the special issue on ‘Time and Psychological Explanation’]. Estudios de Psicología, 23 (1), 7–15
Savage-Rumbaugh, E. S. (1986). Ape language. New York: Columbia University Press.
Shifres, F. (2002). De la fuente de la expresión musical al contenido de la experiencia del oyente [From the source of musical expression to the content of the listener's experience]. En Martínez, I. & Musumeci, O. (Eds.), Actas de la Segunda Reunión Anual de SACCoM (Sociedad Argentina para las Ciencias Cognitivas de la Música). Buenos Aires: Universidad Nacional de Quilmes y SACCoM.
Shifres, F. y Español, S. (2004). Interplay between pretend and music play. Proceedings of the 8th International Conference on Music Perception & Cognition, Evanston, IL.
Smith, P. (2002). Pretend play, metarepresentation and theory of mind. In R. W. Mitchell (Ed.), Pretending and Imagination in animals and children (pp. 255–268). Cambridge University Press.
Stern, D. (1985). The interpersonal World of the Infant: A view from Psychoanalysis and Developmental Psychology. New York: Basic Books.
Stern, D. (1995). The motherhood constellation: A unified view of aren't-infant psychotherapy. New York: Basic Books.
Tomasello, M., & Camaioni, L. (1997). A comparison of the gestural communication of apes and human infants. Human Development, 40, 7–24.
Treuhb, S. (2000). Human processing predispositions and musical universals. In N. L. Wallin B. Merkerdr y S. Brown. (Eds.), The Origins of Music (pp. 427–448). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Trevarthen, C. (1982). The primary motives for cooperative understanding. In G. Butterworth & P. Light. (Eds.), Social Cognition (pp. 77–109). Brighton: Harverster.
Trevarthen, C. (1998). The concept and foundations of infant intersubjectivity. In S. Brâten. (Ed.), Intersubjective Communication and Emotion in Early Ontogeny (pp. 15–46). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Trevarthen, C. (1999/2000). Musicality and the intrinsic motive pulse: evidence from human psychobiology and infant communication. Musicæ Scientiæ, Special Issue, 155–215.
Valsiner, J. (1992). Making of the future: Temporality and the constructive nature of human development. In G. Turkewitz y D. Devenney. (Eds.), Time and Timing in Development. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Vila, I. (1986). Introducción a la obra de Henry Wallon [Introduction to Henry Wallon's production]. Barcelona: Anthropos.
Von Hofsten, C. (2003). On the development of perception and action. In J. Valsiner y K. Connolly (Eds.), Handbook of Developmental Psychology 114–171. London: Sage.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1931/1997). The History of the Development of Higher mental Functions. In R. W. Rieber. (Ed.), The Collected Works of L. S. Vygotsky. Volume 4. New York: Plenum Press.
Wallon, H. (1956). La psychologie génétique. [Genetic psychology]. Bulletin de Psychologie, 10 (1), 3–10.
Wallon, H. (1982). La vie mentale. [Mental life] Messidor/Editions Sociales, París.
Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1963/1984). Symbol formation. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Appadurai, A. (1986/2005) (Ed.). The social life of things. Commodities in cultural perspective. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Appadurai, A. (1996). Modernity at Large. Cultural Dimensions of Globalization. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
Bates, Elisabeth; Begnini, L., Bretherton, I., Camaioni, Luigia; Volterra, Virginia, Carlson, V. Carpen, K. Y. Rosser, M. (1979). The emergence of symbols: Cognition and communication in Infancy. New York: Academic Press.
Barthes, R. (1985). L'aventure sémiologique. Paris: Seuil.
Bouveresse, J. (1998). Le philosophe et le réel. Entretiens avec Jean-Jacques Rosat. Paris: Editions Hachette.
Bremner, G. (2001). Cognitive development: Knowledge of the physical world. In G. Bremner & A. Fogel (Eds.), Blackwell handbook of infant development (pp. 99–138). Oxford: Blackwell.
Bresson, F., & Lebovici, S. (1989). Le développement du langage et la genèse de la communication. In S. Lebovici & F. Weil-Halpern (Eds.), Psychopathologie du bébé (pp. 191–197). Paris: PUF.
Bronckart, J. P. (2000). El problema de la conciencia como “analizador” de las epistemologías de Vygotski y de Piaget. In S. Aznar & E. Serrat (Coords.), Piaget y Vygotski ante el siglo XXI: referentes de actualidad (pp. 15–41). Universitat de Girona. Institut de Ciències de l'Educació: Horsori.
Bronckart, J. P. (2002). La explicación en Psicología ante el desafío del significado. Estudios de Psicología, 23(3), 387–416.
Bronckart, J. P., & Dolz, J. (2002). La notion de competence: Quelle pertinence pour l'étude de l'apprentissage des actions langagières? In J. Dolz & E. Ollagnier (Eds.), L'énigme de la compétence en éducation (pp. 27–44). Bruxelles: De Boeck Université.
Bruner, J. (1975). From communication to Language. A Psychological Perspective. Cognition, 3(1), 255–287.
Bruner, J. (1978). Foreword. In A. Lock (Ed.), Action, gesture and symbol. The emergence of language (pp. ⅶ–ⅷ). London: Academic Press.
Bruner, J. (1982/1984). Los formatos de la adquisición del lenguaje. In Jerome Bruner. Acción, pensamiento y lenguaje (pp. 173–185). Madrid: Alianza. Compilación de J. L. Linaza.
Bruner, J. (1983). Préface. In J. Bruner. Le développement de l'enfant. Savoir faire, savoir dire (pp. 7–9). París: P. U.F. Texts translated and presented by Michel Deleau.
Bruner, J. (1990). Acts of meaning. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Bühler, K. (1934/1990). Theory of Language. The representational function of language. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Carrió, G., & Rabosi, E. (1981/990). La filosofía de John L. Austin. In J. Austin (1962). Cómo hacer cosas con palabras. Barcelona: Paidós.
Castañares, W. (1985). El signo: Problemas semióticos y filosóficos. Tesis doctoral. Madrid: Universidad Complutense de Madrid.
Castañares, W. (2002). Signo y representación en las teorías semióticas. Estudios de Psicología, 23(3) 339–357.
Cassirer, E. (1964/1998). Filosofía de las formas simbólicas. I Lenguaje. México: Fondo de Cultura Económica.
Costall, A. (2007). The windowless room: ‘Mediationism’ and how to get over it (this handbook).
Costall, A. (2006). Doing things with things: The Design and Use of Ordinary Objects. London: Ashgate.
Cronkhite, G. (1990). Psychosemiotics. In T. Sebeok and J. Umiker-Sebeok (Eds.). The semiotic web 1989 (pp. 547–586). Berlin, New York: Mouton de Gruyter.
Daddesio, T. (1994). On minds and symbols. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Delgado, B., Gómez, J. C., & Sarriá, E. (1999). Non-communicative pointing in preverbal children. Poster presented at the IXth European Conference on Developmental Psychology. Spetses, Greece.
Delgado, B., Gómez, J. C., & Sarriá, E. (2004). Is pointing more than a communicative gesture? A study about the role of pointing in regulating one's own attention. Poster presented at the 18th Biennial Meeting of the International Society for the Study of Behavioural Development (ISSBD) July. Gante, Belgium.
Deleau, M. (1990). Les origines sociales du développement mental. Communication et symboles dans la première enfance. Paris: Armand Colin.
Eco, U. (1973/1988). Signo. Barcelona: Labor.
Guidetti, M. (2003). Pragmatique et psychologie du développement. Comment communiquent les jeunes enfants. Paris: Belin.
Hierro, J. (1986). Principios de filosofía del lenguaje. Madrid: Alianza.
Houser, N. (2002). Some thoughts about pragmatics (from a Peircean perspective). Conference presented in the Faculty of Education. Unpublished manuscript. Universidad Autónoma de Madrid.
Lavelli, M., Pantoja, A., Hsu, H. C., Messinger, D., & Fogel, A. (2005). Using microgenetic designs to study change processes. In D. Teti (Ed.), Handbook of research methods in developmental science. Oxford: Blackwell.
Lock, A. (2001). Preverbal communication. In G. Bremner & A. Fogel (Eds.), Blackwell handbook of infant development (pp. 379–403). Oxford: Blackwell.
Martí, E. (2003). Representar el mundo externamente. La adquisición infantil de los sistemas de representación. Madrid: Visor.
Mili, I., & Rickenmann, R. (2004). La construction des objets culturels dans l'enseignement artistique et musical. In C. Moro & R. Rickenmann (Eds.), Situation éducative et significations (pp. 165–196). Bruxelles: De Boeck.
Moro, C., & Rodríguez, C. (2004). L'éducation et le signe comme conditions de possibilité du développement. Un questionnement qui transcende les frontières disciplinaires. In Chatelanat, G., Moro, C. & Saada-Robert, M. (Eds.), Unité et pluralité des sciences de l'éducation. Sondages au coeur de la recherche. Bern-New York: Peter Lang.
Moro, C., & Rodríguez, C. (2005). L'objet et la construction de son usage chez le bébé. Une approche sémiotique du développement préverbal. Berne-New York: Peter Lang.
Nelson, K. (1996). Language in cognitive development. The emergence of the mediated mind. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Ninio, A., & Snow, C. (1996). Pragmatic development. Oxford: WestviewPress.
Nogues, L., Weil-Barais, A., Villeret, O., & Bouchafa, H. (2005). Noter pour se souvenir de quantiés discrètes et continues et faire des déductions: comparaison d'enfants en CE1 et en CM2 (8 et 11 ans). Communication presentée dans le colloque Internationale, Noter pour Penser. Approches développementales et didactiques. Université d'Angers 27–28 Janvier.
Overton, W. (1994). Contexts of meaning: The computational and the embodied mind. In W. Overton & D. Palermo (Eds.), The nature and ontogenesis of meaning (pp. 1–18). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Peirce, Ch. S. (1885). The writings of Charles S. Peirce. Vol. 5. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Peirce, Ch. S. (1896/1931). Collected Papers. The Regenerated Logic, Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Peirce, Ch. S. (1904/1977). Semiotic and Significs: The Correspondence Between Charles S. Peirce and Victoria Lady Welby. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Piaget, J. (1936/1977). La naissance de lintelligence chez lenfant. Neuchâtel-Paris: Delachaux et Niestlé.
Piaget, J. (1937/1977). La construction du réel chez l'enfant. Neuchâtel-Paris: Delachaux et Niestlé.
Putnam, H. (1994). Words and life. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Reddy, V. (2001). Mind knowledge in the first year. In G. Bremner & A. Fogel (Eds.), Blackwell handbook of infant development (pp. 241–264). Oxford: Blackwell.
Rochat, P. (2001/2004). El mundo del bebé. Madrid: Morata.
Rodríguez, C. (2003). Hitos en el desarrollo temprano y prevención de la discapacidad. Published in CD by the organizers of the Congress “Current Perspectives on Special Education.” Ciudad de México, September.
Rodríguez, C. (2006). Del ritmo al símbolo. Los signos en el nacimiento de la inteligencia. Barcelona: ICE-Horsori.
Rodríguez, C., & Moro, C. (1998). El mágico número tres. Cuando los niños aún no hablan. Barcelona: Paidós.
Rodríguez, C., & Moro, C. (1998a). El uso convencional también hace permanentes a los objetos. Infancia y Aprendizaje, 84, 67–83.
Rodríguez, C., & Moro, C. (2002). Objeto, comunicación y símbolo. Una mirada a los primeros usos simbólicos de los objetos. Estudios de Psicología 23/3, 323–338.
Rodríguez, C., & Palacios, P. (2005). Les gestes privés et les origines de la conscience. Communication presentée dans le colloque Internationale, Noter pour Penser. Approches développementales et didactiques. Université d'Angers 27–28 Janvier.
Rodríguez, C., & Palacios, P. (submitted). Do Private Gestures (ostensive and pointing) have a self-regulatory function? A case study. In Legerstee, M. & Reddy, V. (Ed.) Monograph in preparation.
Rodríguez, C., Palacios, P. & Vázquez, J. (2005). First symbols in a girl with Down syndrome. Paper presented at the First ISCAR Congress. Sevilla 20–24th September.
Saada-Robert, M., & Balslev, K. (2004). Une microgenèse située des significations et des savoirs. In C. Moro et R. Rickenmann (Eds.), Situation éducative et significations (pp. 135–163). Bruxelles: De Boeck.
Saussure (De), F. (1916/1985). Cours de linguistique générale. Edition critique préparée par Tullio de Mauro. París: Payot. [English version: Course in General Linguistics. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1966]
Shotter, J. (2001). Towards a third revolution in Psychology: From inner mental representations to dialogically-structured social practices. In D. Bakhurst & S. G. Shanker (Ed.), Jerome Bruner. Language, culture and self (pp. 167–183). London: Sage Publications.
Sinha, C. (2000). Culture, Language and the Emergence of Subjectivity. Culture & Psychology, 6(2), 197–207.
Sinha, C. (2005a). Biology, Culture and the Emergence and Elaboration of Symbolization. In A. Saleemi, O. Bohn & A. Gjedde (Ed.), In Search of a Language for the mind-brain: Can the Multiple Perspectives be Unified? (pp. 311–335). Aarhus: Aarhus University Press.
Sinha, C. (2005b). Blending out of the background: Play, props and staging in the material world. Journal of Pragmatics, 37, 1537–1554.
Thelen, E., & Smith, L. (1994/1998). A dynamic systems approach to the development of cognition and action.Cambridge: MIT Press.
Tomasello, M. (2001). Bruner on language acquisition. In D. Bakhurst & S. G. Shanker (Eds.), Jerome Bruner. Language, culture and self (pp. 31–49). London: Sage Publications.
Tomasello, M., & Rakoczy, H. (2003). What makes human cognition unique? From individual to shared to collective intentionality. Mind & Language, 18, 2, 121–147.
Trevarthen, C., & Hubley, P. (1978). Secondary Intersubjectivity: Confidence, Confiding and Acts of Meaning in the First Year. In A. Lock (Ed.), Action, gesture and symbol. The emergence of language (pp. 183–229). London: Academic Press.
Van Der Veer, R., & Valsiner, J. (1991). Understanding Vygotsky. A Quest for synthesis. Cambridge: Blackwell.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1934/1985). Pensée et Langage. Paris: Editions Sociales.
Wertsch, J. (1996/2000). El papel de la racionalidad abstracta en la imagen vygotskiana de la mente. In A. Tryphon & J. Vonèche (Comps.), Piaget-Vygotsky: La génesis social del pensamiento (pp. 41–63). Buenos Aires: Paidós.
Wilkins, D. (2003). Why pointing with the index finger is not a universal (In sociocultural and semiotic terms). In S. Kita (Ed.), Pointing: Where language, culture and cognition meet (pp. 171–215). New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Wirthner, M., & Schneuwly, B. (2004). Variabilité et contrainte dans la construction des significations d'un objet d'enseignement. L'effet d'un outil pour enseigner le résumé d'un texte informatif. In C. Moro & R. Rickenmann (Eds.), Situation éducative et significations (pp. 107–133). Bruxelles: De Boeck.
Wittgenstein, L. (1953/1958). Philosophical investigations. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Amorim, K. S. (2002). Concretizações de discursos e práticas histórico-sociais, em situações de freqüência de bebês a creche. Unpublished PhD Thesis. USP, Brazil. http://www.teses.usp.br/teses/disponiveis/17/17148/tde-09012003--151152/.
Amorim, K. S., & Rossetti-Ferreira, M. C. (2005). When a child becomes ill: The sociohistorical matrix in meaning–making and practices. In A. U. Branco & J. Valsiner (Ed.) Communication and metacommunication in human development, (pp. 127–149). Greenwich: Information Age Publishing Inc.
Amorim, K. S., Vitoria, T., & Rossetti-Ferreira, M. C. (2000). A Rede de Significações como perspectiva para a análise do processo de inserção de bebês na creche. Cadernos de Pesquisa, 109, 115–144.
Bakhtin, M. (1981). Discourse in the novel. In M. Bakhtin The dialogical imagination. Four Essays. Austin: University of Texas Press. (Original work published 1934).
Bakhtin, M. (1990). Creation of a prosaics. Standford: Standford University Press.
Bourdieu, P. (1989). O Poder Simbólico. [The symbolic power] Lisboa: DIFEL.
Bronfenbrenner, U. (1979). The ecology of human development. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Bronfenbrenner, U. (1993). The ecology of cognitive development: Research models and fugitive findings. In: R. H. Worzniak, & K. Fisher (Eds). Scientific Environments (p. 3–44). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Bussab, V. S. R., & Ribeiro, F. L. (1998). Biologicamente cultural. In, L. Souza, M. F. Q. Freitas, & M. M. P. Rodrigues (Orgs). Psicologia: reflexões (im)pertinentes (pp. 175–193). São Paulo: Casa do psicólogo.
Carvalho, A. M. A. (1983). O desenvolvimento da criança. Pediatria Moderna, 5, 269–280.
Carvalho, A. M. A. (1998). Etologia e comportamento social. In, L. Souza, M. F. Q. Freitas, & M. M. P. Rodrigues (Orgs). Psicologia: reflexões (im)pertinentes (p. 195–224). São Paulo: Casa do Psicólogo.
Fogel, A. (1993). Developing through relationships: Origins of communication, self and culture. Hertfordshire: Harvester Wheatsheaf.
Harré, R. (1998). The singular self: An introduction to the psychology of personhood. London: Sage.
Hermans, H. J. M. (2002). The dialogical self as a society of mind. Theory & Psychology, 12(2), 147–160.
Hermans, H. J. M., & Kempen, H. J. G. (1995). Body, mind and culture: The dialogical nature of mediated action. Culture & Psychology, 1(1), 103–114.
Kuhn, T. S. (1962). The structure of scientific revolutions. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Levy, P. (1993). As tecnologias da inteligência: o futuro do pensamento na era da informática. Rio de Janeiro: (Ed.) 34.
Meltzoff, A. N. (1990). Foundations for developing a concept of self: the role of imitation in relating self to other and the value of social mirroring, social modeling, and self practice in infancy. In D. Cichetti & M. Beeghly (Eds.). The self on transition (pp. 139–164). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Morin, E. (1990) Introdução ao pensamento complexo. Lisboa: Epistemologia e Sociedade.
Morin, E. (1996). Ciência com consciência. Rio de Janeiro: Bertrand do Brasil.
Najmanovitch, D. (1995). Redes. El Linguage de los Vínculos. Buenos Aires: Paidós.
Oliveira, Z. M. R., & Rossetti-Ferreira, M. C. (1994). Coordination of roles: A theoretical-methodological perspective for studying human interactions. In N. Mercer, & C. Coll (Orgs.). Teaching, learning and interaction – volume 3 Explorations in socio-cultural studies (pp. 217–221). Madrid: P. del Rio.
Oliveira, Z. M. R., & Rossetti-Ferreira, M. C. (1996). Understanding the co-constructive nature of human development: role coordination in early peer interaction. In J. Valsiner, & H. Voss (Eds). The structure of learning processes (pp. 177–204). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
Pinheiro, O. & Spink, M. J. P. (2004). Discursive practices and democratic participation: negotiating language use in mental health services. Journal of Health Psychology, 9(1): 55–71.
Roriz, T. (2005). A inclusão social e escolar de crianças com necessidades especiais, sob a óptica dos profissionais de saúde. Unpublished master dissertation. University of São Paulo.
Rossetti-Ferreira, M. C., Amorim, K. S., Silva, A. P. S. (1999). The network of meanings which structures and canalizes interactions, interpretations and comments. Culture and Psychology, 5, 3, 341–353.
Rossetti-Ferreira, M. C., Amorim, K. S., & Silva, A. P. S. (2000). Uma perspectiva teórico-metodológica para análise do desenvolvimento humano e do processo de investigação. Psicologia: Reflexão e Crítica, 13 (2), 281–293.
Rossetti-Ferreira, M. C., Amorim, K. S., & Silva, A. P. S. (2004). Rede de Significações: alguns conceitos básicos. In M. C. Rossetti-Ferreira, K. S. Amorim, A. P. S. Silva, & A. M. A. Carvalho (Orgs.). Rede de Significações e o estudo do desenvolvimento humano (pp. 23–34). Porto Alegre: Artmed.
Rossetti-Ferreira, M. C., Amorim, K. S., & Vitória, T. (1996). Emergência de novos significados durante o processo de adaptação de bebês à creche. Coletâneas da ANPPEP, 1, 4, 111–143.
Rossetti-Ferreira, M. C., Amorim, K. S., & Vitória, T. (1997). Integração família e creche – O acolhimento é o princípio de tudo. Estudos em Saúde Mental. Ribeirão Preto, F. M. R. P. – USP, p. 107–131.
Salgado, J., & Gonçalves, M. (in this book, at Chapter 26). The dialogical self: Social, personal, and (un)conscious.
Sampson, E. E. (1993). Celebrating the other: a dialogic account of human nature. New York: Harvester Wheatsheaf.
Silva, A. P. S. (2003). Continuidade e mudança no desenvolvimento: trabalhando narrativas de homens envolvidos com a prática de delitos. Unpublished PhD. thesis, University of São Paulo, Brazil.
Solon, L., Costa, N. R., & Rossetti-Ferreira, M. C. (2005). Narratives of late-placed children about their adoption process. First International Society for Cultural and Activity Research Congress – Book of Abstracts. Vol. 1. Sevilla: Akron Gráfica.
Spink, M. J. P. (1999). Making sense of illness experiences. In: M. Murray & K. Chamberlain (Eds). Qualitative Health Psychology (p. 83–97). London: Sage.
Trevarthen, C. (1986). Form, significance and psychological potential of hand gestures of infants. In J.-L. Nespoulous, P. Perron & A. R. Lecours (Eds.). The biological foudation (pp. 149–202). Hillsdale.: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Valsiner, J. (1987). Culture and the development of children's actions. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons.
Valsiner, J. (1994). Irreversibility of time and the construction of historical developmental psychology. Mind, Culture and Activity, 1 (1–2), 25–42.
Volosinov, V. N. (1929/2000). Marxism and the philosophy of language. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1978). Mind in society. Cambridge: MIT Press.
Waddington, C. H. (1966). The strategy of the genes. London: Allen & Unwin.
Wallon, H. (1941). A criança e o adulto, em M. J. Werebe e J. Nadel-Brulfert (Org.) (1986) Henri Wallon (p. 68 – 71). SP: (Ed.), Ática.
Wallon, H. (1959a). O papel do outro na consciência do eu, em M. J. Werebe e J. Nadel-Brulfert (Org.) (1986) Henri Wallon (p. 158–167). SP: (Ed.), Ática.
Wallon, H. (1959b). Os meios, os grupos e a psicogênese da criança, em M. J. Werebe e J. Nadel-Brulfert (Org.) (1986) Henri Wallon (p. 168–178). SP: (Ed.), Ática.
Yazlle, C. (2001). Pré-escolas convivendo com a paralisia cerebral: uma análise do processo de inclusão/exclusão. Unpublished master dissertation. University of São Paulo, Brazil.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Bakhtin, M. (1981). The Dialogical Imagination. Four Essays. Austin: University of Texas Press.
Bates, E. (1976). Language and Context. New York: Academic Press.
Bruner, J., Olver, R. R., & Greenfield, P. M. (1966). Studies in Cognitive Growth. New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Byrne, R. W. & Withen, A. (Eds.), (1988). Machiavellian Intelligence. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Costall, A. P. (1995). Socializing Affordances. Theory & Psychology, 5, 467–482.
de Waal, F. (1982). Chimpanzee Politics. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University Press.
Dennet, D. (1991). Consciousness Explained. London: Penguin.
Dewey, J. (1917). The need for a Recovery in Philosophy. In R. J. Bernstein (Ed.), John Dewey: On Experience, Nature and Freedom: Representative Selections. New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1960, 19–69.
Español, S. (2007). Alive Movement in Symbol Formation. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Fields, W. M., Segerdahl, P., & Savage-Rumbaugh, S. (2007). The material Practices of ape language research. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Socio-cultural Psychology (pp. 169–186). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Foucault, M. de (1969/1972). The Archaeology of Knowledge. And the Discourse on Language. New York: Tavistock.
Frijda, N. H. (2004). Emotion and Action. In A. S. R. Manstead, N. Frijda & A. Fischer (Eds). Feelings and Emotion. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 158–173.
Froufe, M. (1997). El inconsciente cognitivo. La cara oculta de la mente. Madrid: Biblioteca Nueva.
González, A. (1997). Estructuras de la praxis. Ensayo de una filosofía primera. Madrid: Trotta.
James, W. (1890). The Principles of Psychology. New York: Holt.
Köhler, W. (1925). The Mentality of Apes. New York: Harcourt Brace.
Leont'ev, A. N. (1978). Activity, Consciousness and Personality. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall.
Liszka, J. J. (1996). A General Introduction to the Semeiotic of Charles Saunders Peirce. Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana University Press.
Peirce, C. S. (1931–1958). Collected Papers of Charles Sanders Peirce (8 vols.) Charles Hartshorn, Paul Weiss, and Arthur Burks (Eds). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Paolicchi, P. (2007). The institutions inside. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 560–575). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Perinat, A. (2007). Comparative Development of Communication. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 140–163). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Piaget, J. & Inhelder, B. (1966). L'image mentale chez l'enfant. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
Riba, C. (1995). De ayer y de hoy: Charles S. Peirce (1839–1914). Anuario de Psicología, 64, 83–89.
Ricoeur, P. (1990). Soi-même comme un autre. Paris: Éditions du Seuil.
Rivière, A. (1984). Acción e interacción en el origen del símbolo. In J. Palacios, A. Marchesi y M. Carretero, Psicología Evolutiva (vol. 2). Madrid: Alianza Editorial, pp. 145–174.
Rivière, A. & Sotillo, A. (1999). Comunicazione, sospensione e semiosi umana. Metis 1, 45–76.
Rodríguez, C. (2007). Object Use, Communication and Signs: The Triadic Basis of Early Cognitive Development. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 257–276). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Rodríguez, C. & Moro, C. (1999). El mágico número tres. Cuando los niños aún no hablan. Barcelona: Paidós.
Rosa, A. (2007). Acts of Psyche. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 205–237). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Rosa, A., Gomila, A., & Vega, J. (2004). La evolución de la mente. Algunas consideraciones metodológicas y substantivas. Estudios de Psicología, 25(2) 205–215.
Rosetti-Ferreira, M., Amorim, K., & Silva, A. P. S. (2007). Development through Social Matrix of Meaning. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 277–292).New York: Cambridge University Press.
Sato, T., Yasuda, Y., Kido, A., Arakawa, A., Muzoguchi, H., & Valsiner, J. (2007). What kind of Sampling in Socio-Cultural Research? In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge handbook of Socio-cultural Psychology (pp. 82–108). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Searle, J. (1984). Panel Discussion: Has Artificial Intelligence Research Illuminated Human Thinking?. In H. Pagels (Ed.), Computer Culture: The Scientific, Intellectual and Social Impact of the Computer. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 426.
Scherer, K. R. (2004). Feelings Integrate the Central Representation of Appraisal-Driven Response Organization in Emotion. In A. S. R. Manstead, N. Frijda, & A. Fischer (Eds.), Feelings and Emotion. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 136–157.
Sherif, M. (1936). Psychology of social norms. New York: Holt.
Valsiner, J. (1997). Culture and the Development of Children's Action. New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Valsiner, J. (2005). Soziale und Emotionale Entwicklungsaufgaben im kulturellen Kontext. In J. Asendorpf & H. Rauh (Eds.), Enzyklopädie der Psychologie. Vol. 3. Soziale, emotionale und Persönlichkeitsentwicklung. Göttingen: Hogrefe, 677–728.
Valsiner, J. & van der Veer, R. (1996). Desde el gesto hasta el self: perspectivas comunes en las sociopsicologías de George Herbert Mead y Lev Vygotsky. In D. Páez & A. Blanco (Eds.), La Teoría Sociocultural y la Psicología Social Actual. Madrid: Fundación Infancia y Aprendizaje, 63–73.
Von Uexküll, J. J. (1928). Theoretische Biologie. Berlin: Julius Springer.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1934). Thinking and Speech. In R. W. Rieber & A. S. Carton (Eds.), The Collected Works of L. S. Vygotsky. Vol. 1. Problems of General Psychology. New York: Plenum, 39–285.
Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1963/1984). Symbol Formation. Hillsdale: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Wertsch, J. (1991). Voices of the Mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Wundt, W. (1973). The language of Gestures. The Hague: Mouton.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Anderson, C., & Keltner, D. (2004). The emotional convergence hypothesis: Implications for individuals, relationships, and cultures. In L. Tiedens & C. W. Leach (Eds.), The social life of emotions. pp. 144–163. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Azuma, H. (2000). Indigenous to what? International Society for the Study of Behavioral Development Newsletter, 37, 9–10.
Baron, R., & Kenny, D. (1986). The moderator–mediator variable distinction in social psychological research: Conceptual, strategic and statistical considerations. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 51, 1173–1182.
Bartlett, F. C. (1932). Remembering : a study in experimental and social psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Batson, C. (1990). How social an animal: The human capacity for caring. American Psychologist, 45(3) 336–346.
Batson, C. (1991). The altruism question: Toward a social psychological answer. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Batson, C., Klein, T., Highberger, L., & Shaw, L. (1995). Immorality from empathy-induced altruism: When compassion and justice conflict. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 68, 1042–1054.
Befu, H. (1993). Nationalism and Nihonjinron. In H. Befu (Ed.), Cultural nationalism in East Asia: Representations and identity (pp. 107–133). Berkeley: University of California, Berkeley, Institute of East Asian Studies.
Bruner, J. (1996). Culture of education. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Chartrand, T., & Bargh, J. (1999). The Chameleon effect: The perception-behavior link and social interaction. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 76, 893–910.
Choi, B-Y. (2003). Psychology of mind cultivation. Presented at the Special Symposium by Korean Society of Social and Personality Psychology, Chung-Ang University. Seoul, S. Korea.
Choi, I., & Nisbett, R. E. (1998). Situational salience and cultural differences in the correspondence bias and the actor-observer bias. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 24, 949–960.
Choi, I., & Choi, Y. (2002). Culture and self-concept flexibility. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 28, 1508–1517.
Choi, S-C., & Yoo, K. J. (2002). Mind models of Korean people: Folk psychological and Neo-Confucianism conceptions of mind. Paper presented at the 2nd International Conference of Central Asian Association for Korean Studies, May 10–11, Seoul National University, Korea.
Choi, S-C. (2000). Hankookin shimleehak [Korean psychology]. Seoul, Korea: Jung-Ahng University Press.
Choi, S-C. (2004). The rule of justice and the way of heart: An analysis of Western and Eastern conception of social relationship. A Keynote Address in the XXVIII Int. Congress of Psychology, 8–13, August, Beijing, China.
Choi, S. C., & Choi, S. H. (1994). We-ness: A Korean discourse of collectivism. In G. Yoon, & S. C. Choi (Eds.), Psychology of the Korean people (pp. 57–84). Seoul: Dong-A Publishing & Printing Co., Ltd.
Choi, S. C., & Choi, S. H. (2001). Cheong: The socio-emotional grammar of Koreans. International Journal of Group Tensions, 30(1), 69–80.
Choi, S-C., Han, G., & Kim, K. (2004). Monological and dialogical nature of intersubjective emotion of shimcheong. Presented at a symposium “The dialogical nature of affective processes: Empathy reconsidered.” In the 3rd International Conference on Dialogical Self. August 28. Warsaw, Poland.
Choi, S. C., & Kim, C-W. (1998a). “Shimcheong” psychology as a cultural psychological approach to collective meaning construction. The Korean Journal of Social and Personality Psychology, 12(2), 79–96.
Choi, S. C., & Kim, C-W. (1998b). Does the multiple self need an identity?: Concerning alternative constructions of the ‘self.’ Presented at the 4th Congress of the International Society for Cultural Research and Activity Theory, Aahus (Denmark), 7–11 June.
Choi, S. C., & Kim, J-Y., & Kim, K. (2000). The Structural relationship analysis among the psychological structure of Cheong (Sweet Cheong, hateful Cheong), its behaviors, and functions. The Korean Journal of Social and Personality Psychology, 14(1) 203–222.
Choi, S. C., & Kim, K. (1999a). A conceptual exploration of the Korean self. The Korean Journal of Social and Personality Psychology, 13(2), 275–292.
Choi, S. C., & Kim, K. (1999b). The Shimcheong psychology: Psychological characteristics, interactions, and development of Shimcheong, The Korean Journal of Psychology, 18(1), 1–16.
Choi, S. C., & Kim, K. (2002). A Conceptual Exploration of the Korean Self: In Comparison with the Western Self. In K-S Yang, K-K Hwang, P. Pedersen, & I. Diabo (Eds.), Progress in Asian social psychology: Conceptual and empirical contributions (chapter 2). Greenwood.
Crocker, J., & Wolfe, C. (2001). Contingencies of self-worth. Psychological Review., 108(3), 593–623.
Diriwächter, R. (2004). Ganzheitspsychologie: The doctrine. From Past to Future, 5(1), 3–16.
Doi, T. (1973). The Anatomy of dependence. New York: Kodansha International. (Amae no kozo, Japanese text, published in 1966).
Doi, T. (1996). Forward. (pp. ⅹⅴ–ⅹⅶ). In D. Shwalb & B. Shwalb (Eds.), Japanese childrearing: Two generations of scholarship. New York: The Guilford Press.
Eisenberg, N., Losoya, S., & Spindrad, T. (2003). Affect and prosocial responding. In R. Davidson, K. Scherer, & H. Goldsmith, (Eds.), Handbook of affective sciences. pp. 787–803. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Ekman, P. (1972). Universals and cultural differences in facial expressions of emotion. In J. K. Cole (Ed.), Nebraska symposium on motivation. Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.
Enriquez, V. G. (1994). From colonial to liberation psychology: The Philippine experience. International Edition. Manila, Philippine: De LaSalle University Press.
Fingarette, H. (1972). Confucius-The secular as sacred. New York: Harper Torchbooks.
Freeman, D. (1983). Margaret Mead and Samoa: The making and unmaking of an anthropological myth. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Frijda, N. H. (1986). The emotions. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Fuhrer, U. (2004). Cultivating minds: Identity as meaning-making practice. London: Routledge.
Geertz, C. (1960). The religion of Java. New York: Free Press.
Geertz, C. (1993). Local knowledge. London: Fontana Press.
Geertz, C. (2000). Available light: Anthropological reflections on philosophical topics. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Gerber, E. (1975). The cultural patterning of emotions in Samoa. Ph.D. diss., University of California, San Diego.
Gerber, E. (1985). Rage and obligation: Samoan emotion in conflict. In G. White & J. Kirkpatrick (Eds.), Person, self, and experience (pp. 121–167). Berkeley: University of California Press.
Gjerde, P. F. (2001). Attachment, culture, and amae. American Psychologist, 56, 826–827.
Gjerde, P. F., & Onishi, M. (2000). Selves, cultures, and nations: The psychological representation of “the Japanese” in the era of globalization. Human Development, 43, 23–33.
Goffman, E. (1959). The presentation of self in everyday life. Garden City, NY: Doubleday.
Gopnik, A. (1993a). How we know our minds: The Illusion of first-person knowledge of intentionality. Behavioral and brain sciences, 16, 1–14.
Greenfield, P. (1994). Independence and interdependence as developmental scripts: Implications for theory, research, and practice. In P. M. Greenfield & R. Cocking (Eds.), Cross-cultural rootes of minority child development. pp. 1–37. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Greenfield, P. (1998). Culture as process: Empirical methods for cultural psychology. In J. Berry, Y. Poortinga, & J. Pandey (Eds.), Handbook of cross-cultural psychology. Vol. 1. pp. 310–346. Needham Heights, MA: Ally & Bacon.
Gudykunst, W., Ting-Toomey, S., & Nishida, T. (1996). Communication in personal relationships across cultures. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Hall, E. T. (1976). Beyond culture. Garden city, NY: Doubleday.
Hamaguchi, E. (1985). A contextual model of the Japanese: Toward a methodological innovation of Japanese studies. Journal of Japanese Studies, 11, 289–321.
Han, G., & Shin, S-J. (2000). A cultural profile of Korean society: From vertical collectivism to horizontal individualism. Korean Social Science Journal, 27(2), 69–96.
Hansen, C. (1983). Language and logic in ancient China. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
Harre, R., & Parrott, G. (1996). The emotions; social, cultural and biological dimensions. London: Sage.
Hatfield, E., Cacioppo, J., & Rapson, R. (1992). Emotional contagion. In M. Clark (Ed.), Review of personality and social psychology. Vol. 14. Emotion and social behavior. pp. 151–177. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Heelas, P. (1996). Emotion talk across cultures. In R. Harre, & G. Parrott (1996). The emotions; social, cultural and biological dimensions. pp. 171–199. London: Sage
Heine, S. J., Kitayama, S., Lehman, D. R., Takata, T., Ide, E., Lueng, C., & Matsumoto, H. (2001). Divergent consequences of success and failure in Japan and North America: An investigation of self-improving motivations and malleable selves. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 80, 599–615.
Heine, S. J., Lehman, D. R., Markus, H. R., & Kitayama, S. (1999). Is there a universal need for positive self-regard? Psychological Review, 106, 766–794.
Hermans, H. (1996). Voicing the self: From information processing to dialogical interchange. Psychological Bulletin., 119(1), Jan. 1996 31–50.
Hermans, H. (2001). The dialogical self: Toward a theory of personal and cultural positioning. Culture & Psychology, 7(3), 243–282.
Hermans, H., & Kempen, H. (1993). The dialogical self: Meaning as movement. San Diego, CA: Academic Press.
Hermans, H., & Kempen, H. (1998). Moving cultures: The perilous problems of cultural dichotomies in a globalizing society. American Psychologist, 53, 1111–1120.
Ho, D. Y. F. (1998). Interpersonal relationships and relationship dominance: An analysis based on methodological relationism. Asian Journal of Social Psychology, 1, 1–16.
Ho, D. Y. F. (1996). Indigenous psychologies: Asian perspectives. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 29, 88–103.
Hoffman, M. (1982). Development of prosocial motivation: Empathy and guilt. In N. Eisenberg (ed), The development of prosocial behavior (pp. 281–313). New York: Academic Press.
Homans, G. (1961). Social behavior: Its elementary form. (Rev. ed) New York: Harcourt.
Howes, M., Hokanson, J., & Loewenstein, D. (1985). Induction of depressive affect after prolonged exposure to a mildly depressed individual. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 49, 1110–1113.
Kashima, Y., Yamaguchi, S., Kim, U., Choi, S.-C., Gelfand, M. J., & Yuki, M. (1995). Culture, gender, and self: A perspective from individualism-collectivism research. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 69, 925–937.
Kelley, H., & Thibaut, J. (1978). Interpersonal relations: A theory of interdependence. New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Kitayama, S., & H. Markus (1994). Emotion and culture: Empirical studies of mutual influence. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Krueger, F. (1926). Ueber psychische Ganzheit. In Neue psychologische studien, Bd. 1, 1–121.
Krueger, F. (1928). The essence of feeling. In M. Reymert (Ed.), Feelings and emotions: The Wittenberg symposium (pp. 58–86). Worcester, MA: Clark University Press.
Krueger, F. (1928/1953). Das Wesen der Gefuhle. In E. Heuss (Ed.), Zur philosophie und psychologie der Ganzheit: Schriften aus den Jahren 1918–1940 (pp. 195–221). Berlin, Germany: Springer Verlag.
La France, M. (1979). Nonverbal synchrony and rapport: Analysis by the cross-lag panel technique. Social Psychology Quarterly, 42, 66–70.
Lewin, K. (1936). Principles of topological psychology. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Lillard, A. (1998). Ethnopsychologies: Cultural variations in theories of mind. Psychological Bulletin, 123, 3–32.
Lutz, C. (1982). The domain of emotion words on Ifaluk. American Ethnologist, 9, 113–128.
Lutz, C. (1988). Unnatural emotions. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Markus, H. R., & Kitayama, S. (1991). Culture and self: Implications for cognition, emotion, and motivation. Psychological Review, 98, 224–252.
Markus, H. R., & Kitayama, S. (1994). The cultural construction of self and emotion: Implications for social behavior. In S. Kitayama & H. Markus (Eds.), Emotion and culture: Empirical studies of mutual influence (p. 89–130). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Menon, U., & Shweder, R. (1998). The return of ‘white man's burden’. In R. A. Shweder (Ed.), Welcome to middle age! Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Menon, U., & Shweder, R. A. (1994). Kali's tongue: Cultural psychology and the power of shame in Orissa, India. In S. Kitayama & H. Markus (Eds.), Emotion and culture (pp. 241–185). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Mesquita, B., & Frijda, N. (1992). Cultural variations in emotions: A review. Psychological Bulletin, 112, 179–204.
Nisbett, R. (2003). The geography of thought. New York: Free Press.
Nisbett, R. E., Peng, K., Choi, I., & Norenzayan, A. (2001). Culture and systems of thought: Holistic versus analytic cognition. Psychological Review, 108, 291–310.
Ochs, E. (1988). Culture and language development. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Osgood, C., May, W., & Miron, M. (1975). Cross-cultural universals of affective meaning. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.
Oyserman, D., Coon, H. M., & Kemmelmeyer, M. (2002). Rethinking individualism and collectivism: Evaluation of theoretical assumptions and meta-analyses. Psychological Bulletin, 128, 3–72.
Parrot, W. (2000). Emotions in social psychology. Philadelphia: Psychology Press.
Peng, K., & Nisbett, R. (1999). Culture, dialectics, and reasoning about contradiction. American Psychologist, 54, 741–754.
Perner, J. (1991). Understanding the representation of mind. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Piaget, J. (1932). The moral judgment of the child. New York: Harcourt Brace.
Ratner, C. (2000). A cultural-psychological analysis of emotions. Culture & Psychology, 6(1), 5–39.
Rhee, E., Uleman, J. S., Lee, H. K., & Roman, R. J. (1995). Spontaneous self-descriptions and ethnic identities in individualistic and collectivistic cultures. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 69, 142–152.
Rodriguez-Mosquera, P., Fischer, A., & Manstead, A. (2004). Inside the heart of emotion: On culture and relational concerns. In L. Tiedens & C. W. Leach (Eds.), The social life of emotions. pp. 187–202. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Rosaldo, M. (1980). Knowldege and passion: Ilongot notions of self and social life. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Rosaldo, R. (1993). Culture and truth: The remaking of social analysis. Boston, MA: Beacon Press.
Shin, Y-B. (2005). Lectures: My reading of Oriental classics. [Gangui], Seoul: Dolbyugae.
Shweder, R. (1994). In S. Kitayama & H. Markus (Eds.), Emotion and culture: Empirical studies of mutual influence (pp. 89–130). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Shweder, R. A., & Bourne, E. J. (1984). Does the concept of the person vary cross-culturally? In R. A. Shweder & R. A. LeVine (Eds.), Culture theory (pp. 158–199). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Sklovsky, V. (1969). Die Kunst als Verfahren. In J. Striedter (Hrsg.), Russischer Formalismus. Munchen: Wilhelm Fink.
Staeuble, I. (1996). Historische und kulturelle Psychologie: In H. Gundlach (Hrsg.), Untersuchungen zur Geschichte der Psychologie und der Psychotechnik. Passau: Profil.
Stein, E. (1917). On the problem of empathy. Trans. W. Stein.: Washington, D. C. ICS Publications.
Stern, D. (1992). The role of feelings for an interpersonal self. In U. Neisser (Ed.), The perceived self: Ecological and interpersonal sources of self-knowledge. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Stern, D., Dore, J., Hofer, L., & Hoft, W. (1993). Affect attunement: The sharing of feeling states between mother and infant by means of inter-model fluency. In, T. Field & N. Fox (Eds.), Social perception in infants. Norwood, NJ: Ablex Publishing Corporations.
Suh, E. M. (2002). Culture, identity consistency, and subjective well-being. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 83(6), 1378–1391.
Takano, Y., & Osaka, E. (1999). An unsupported common view: Comparing Japan and the U.S. on individualism/collectivism. Asian Journal of Social Psychology, 2, 311–341.
Triandis, H. C. (1989). The self and social behavior in differing contexts. Psychological Review, 96, 505–520.
Triandis, H. C. (1995). Individualism and collectivism. Boulder, CO: Westview Press.
Valsiner, J. (1986). The individual subject and scientific psychology. New York: Plenum.
Valsiner, J. (2000). Culture and human development. London: Sage Publications.
Valsiner, J. (2001). Cultural developmental psychology of affective processes. Invited lecture at the 15. Tagung der Fachgruppe Entwicklungspsychologie der Deutschen Gesellschaft fur Psychologies, Potsdam, Sept. 5.
Valsiner, J., & Van Der Veer, R. (2000). The social mind: Construction of the idea. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Vandello, J. A., & Cohen, D. (1999). Patterns of individualism and collectivism across the United States. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 77, 279–292.
Vogel, S. (1996). Urban middle class Japanese family life, 1958–1996: A personal and evolving perspective. (pp. 177–201). In D. Shwalb & B. Shwalb (Eds.), Japanese childrearing: Two generations of scholarship. New York: The Guilford Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1978). Mind in society: The development of higher psychological processes. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1981). The genesis of higher mental functions. In J. V. Wertsch (Ed.), The concept of activity in Soviet psychology (pp. 144–188). Armonk, NY: Sharpe.
Vygotski, L. S. (1985a). Die psychische Systeme. In L. Vygotski, Ausgewählte Schriften. Bd. 1. Köln: Phal-Rugenstein.
Wellman, H. M. (1990). The child's theory of mind. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Wellman, H. M. (1993). Early Understanding of mind: the normal case. In S. Baron-Cohen, H. Tager-Flusberg & D. J. Cohen, (Eds.), Understanding other minds: Perspectives from Autism (pp. 10–39). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Whiting, B. (1976). The problem of the packaged variable. In K. Riegel & J. Meacham (Eds.), The developing individual in a changing world (Vol. 1, pp. 303–309). The Hague: Mouton.
Yoo, K. J. (2003). Toegye's Simhak (Learning of Mind) and Confucian proprieties. Journal of History for Korean Thoughts, 21, 271–300. [Korean]
Zabinski, B., & Valsiner, J. (2004). Affective syntesis of the other through the self: A new look at empathy. Paper presented at the 3rd International Conference on Dialogical Self. Warsaw, Poland, August, 28.
Zittoun, T. (2004). Janet's emotions in the whole of human conduct. From Past to Future, 5(1), 24–39.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Abbey, E. & Davis, P. C. (2003). Constructing one's identity through music. In I. E. Josephs (Ed.), Dialogicality in development (pp. 67–86). Westport, CT: Praeger.
Aberbach, D. (1989). Surviving trauma. Loss, literature and psychoanalysis. New Haven/London: Yale University Press.
Auster, P. (2002). The Book of Illusions, a novel. New York/London: Faber & Faber.
Bakhtin, M. M. (1979/1986). Speech genres and other late essays (trans: V. McGee). Austin: University of Texas.
Baltes, P. B. (1997). On the incomplete architecture of human ontogeny. Selection, Optimization and Compensation as foundation of developmental psychology, American Psychologist, 52, 366–380.
Bennett, M. (Ed.), (1999). Developmental psychology: achievements and prospects. Philadelphia/London: Psychology Press.
Benson, C. (2001). The cultural psychology of self. London: Routledge.
Bion, W. R. (1977). Seven Servants. Four works by W. R. Bion. New York: John Aronson.
Bronckart, J. P. (Ed.), (1985). Le fonctionnement des discours: un modèle psychologique et une méthode d'analyse. Lausanne: Delachaux & Niestlé. [The functioning of discourse: a psychological model and a method of analysis].
Bruner, J. S. (1986). Actual minds, possible worlds. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Bruner, J. S. (1990). Acts of meaning. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Cole, M. (1995). Culture and cognitive development: from cross-cultural research to creating systems of cultural mediation. Culture & Psychology, 1, 25–54.
Cole, M. (1996). Cultural psychology. A once and future discipline. Cambridge, MA/London: The Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
Csikszentmihaly, M. & Larson, R. (1984). Being adolescent. Conflict and growth in the teenage years. New York: Basic books.
De Certeau, M. (1980/1984). The practice of everyday life (Translated by S. Rendall). Berkeley: University of California Press.
Dinello, R. & Perret-Clermont, A.-N. (Eds.) (1988). Psychopédagogie interculturelle. Cousset (Fribourg): DelVal & Université de Neuchâtel. [Intercultural psychopedagogy].
Doise, W. (1982). L'explication en psychologie sociale. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France. [Explanation in social psychology].
Duveen, G. & Lloyd, B. (Eds.) (1990). Social representations and the development of knowledge. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Duveen, G. (2001). Representations, identities, resistance. In K. Deaux & G. Philogene (Eds.) Social representation: Introductions and Explorations. Oxford: Blackwell.
Erikson, E. H. (1968/1994). Identity: youth and crisis. New York/London: W. W. Norton.
Fasulo, A., Girardet, H., & Pontecorvo, C. (1998). Historical practices in school through photographical reconstruction. Mind, Culture and Activity, 5, 4, 253–271.
Fiske, J. & Hartley, J. (1978/2003). Reading television (extended version). London/New York: Routledge.
Flaubert, G. (1857/1999). Madame Bovary. Life in a country town (Trans. G. Hopkins). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Fonagy, P., Gergely, G., Jurist, E. L., Target, M. (2002). Affect regulation, mentalisation, and the development of the self. New York: Other Press.
Fonyi, A. (1994). Lire, écrire, analyser. La littérature dans la pratique analytique. Paris: L'Harmattan. [Reading, writing, analysing. Literature in psychoanalytical practice].
Forrester, M. (2000). Psychology of the image. London/Philadelphia: Routledge.
Freud, S. (1900/2001). The interpretation of dreams. In J. Strachey (Ed. and Trans.), The standard edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund Freud (Vol. 4–5, pp. 1–630). London: Hogarth.
Freud, S. (1901/2001). On dreams. The standard edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund Freud (Vol. 5, pp. 631–678). London: Hogarth.
Freud, S. (1908/2001). Creative writers and day-dreaming. In J. Strachey (Ed. and Trans.), The standard edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund Freud (Vol. 9, pp. 141–153). London: Hogarth.
Fuhrer, U. (2004). Cultivating minds. Identity as meaning-making practices. Hove/New York: Routledge.
Fuhrer, U. & Josephs, I. E. (Eds.) (1999), Persönliche Objekte, Identität und Entwicklung. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. [Personal objects, identity and development].
Garland, A. (1997/2004). The Beach. London: Penguin.
Geertz, C. (1972). Religion as a cultural system. In C. Geertz (1973), The Interpretation of culture, selected papers (pp. 87–126). New York: Basic Books.
Gillespie, A. (2005a). Malcolm X and his autobiography: Identity development and self-narration. Culture & Psychology, 11, 77–88.
Gillespie, A. (2005b). G. H. Mead: Theorist of the social act. Journal for the Theory of Social Behavior, 35, 1, 19–39.
Gillespie, A. (2005c in press). Time, self and the other: The striving tourist in Ladakh, north India. In L. Simao and J. Valsiner (Eds.) Otherness in question: Development of the self. Greenwich, CT: Information Age Publishing, Inc.
Gillespie, A. (2006). Becoming other: From social interaction to self-reflection. Greenwich, CT: Information Age Publishing, Inc.
Gilligan, C. (1982/1983). In a different voice. Psychological theory and women's development. Cambridge, MA & London: Harvard University Press.
Green, A. (1969). La lecture psychanalytique des tragiques. Un oeil vivant: le complexe d'Oedipe dans la tragédie (pp. 10–47) Paris: Éditions de Minuit. [A psychoanalytical reading of tragic].
Green, A. (2000). André Green at the Squiggle Foundation. (Ed.) J. Abrams. London: Karnac Books.
Green, A. (2002). Abrégé de psychanalyse. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France. [Short guide to psychoanalysis].
Grossen, M. (1999). Approches dialogiques des processus de transmission-acquisition des savoirs. Une brève introduction. Actualités psychologiques (Institut de psychologie, Lausanne), 7, 1–32. [Dialogical approaches of the processes of transmission and acquisition of knowledge. A short introduction].
Grossen, M. (2000). Institutional framings in learning and teaching. In H. Cowie, V. D. Aalsvort & N. Mercer (Eds.). Social interaction in learning and instruction: the meaning of discourse for the construction of knowledge (pp. 21–34). Amsterdam: Pergamon Press.
Grossen, M. & Perret-Clermont, A. N. (Ed), (1992). L'espace thérapeutique, Cadres et contextes. Neuchâtel (Switzerland)/Paris: Delachaux et Niestlé. [The therapeutic space. Frames and contexts].
Habermas, T. (1996/1999). Geliebte Objekte: Symbole und Instrumente der Identitätsbildung. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp. [Loved objects: symbols and tools for identity construction].
Habermas, T. (1999). Persönliche Objekte und Bindungen im Prozess der Ablösung vom Elternhaus. In U. Fuhrer & I. E. Josephs (Eds.). Persönliche Objekte, Identität und Entwicklung (pp. 109–133). Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. [Personal objects and attachments in the process of separation from the parental house].
Harris, P. L. (2000). The work of the imagination. Oxford/Malden, Ma: Blackwell.
Heath, S. B. (1996). Ruling places: Adaptation in development by inner-city youth. In R. Jessor A. Colby & Shweder, R. A. (Eds.), Ethnography and Human Development, Context and Meaning in Social Inquiry (pp. 225–251). Chicago: University of Chicago.
Heath, S. B. (2000). Seeing our way into learning. Cambridge Journal of Education, 30, 1, 121–132.
Henri, C. (2003). De Marivaux et du Loft. Petites leçons de littérature au lycée. Paris: P. O. L [About Marivaux and Big Brother. Little stories about literature at college].
Hermans, H. J. M. & Kempen, H. J. G. (1993). The Dialogical Self. Meaning as movement. San Diego: Academic Press.
Hrabal, B. (1976/1992). Too loud a solitude (transl. M. H. Heim), San Diego/New York: Harcourt Brace.
Hundeide, K. (2003) Becoming a committed insider. Culture & Psychology, 9, 107–127.
Hundeide, K. (2004). A new identity, a new life-style. In A.-N. Perret -Clermont, C. Pontecorvo, L. Resnick, T. Zittoun & B. Burge (Eds.). Joining Society: Social interaction and learning in adolescence and youth (pp. 86–108). Cambridge/New York: Cambridge University Press.
Hutchins, E. (1995). Cognition in the wild. Cambridge, MA/London: MIT Press.
Janet, P. (1934/1935). Les débuts de l'intelligence. Paris: Flammarion. [The beginnings of intelligence].
Josephs, I. E. (1997). Talking with the dead: Self-construction as dialogue. Journal of Narrative and Life History, 71, 1–4, 359–367.
Josephs, I. E. (1998). Constructing One's Self in the City of the Silent: Dialogue, Symbols, and the Role of “As-if” in Self-Development. Human Development, 41, 180–195.
Kaës, R. (1994). La parole et le lien. Paris: Dunod. [The word and the link].
Kaës, R. (Ed.), (1996). Contes et divans. Médiation du conte dans la vie psychique. Paris: Dunod). [Tales and couch. The mediation of the tale in psychic life].
Kamberlis, G. & Dimitriadis, G. (1998). Talkin' Tupac: Speech Genres and the Mediation of Cultural Knowledge. In C. M. Carthy, G. Hudak, S. Allegretto, & P. Saukko (Eds.), Sound Identities: Popular music and the cultural politics of education. New York: Peter Lang.
Kavanagh, G. (2000). Dream spaces. Memory and the museum. London/New York: Leicester University Press.
Kundera, M. (1986/1988). The art of the novel. (Trans. L. Asher). London/Boston: Faber & Faber.
Lawrence, J. & Valsiner, J. (1993). Conceptual roots of internalisation: from transmission to transformation. Human Development, 36, 150–167.
Lawrence, J. & Valsiner, J. (2003). Making Personal Sense. An Account of basic Internalisation and Externalisation Processes. Theory & Psychology, 13, 6, 723–752.
Lawrence, J., Benedikt, R., & Valsiner, J. (1992). Homeless in the Mind: A Case-History of personal Life in and out of a Close orthodox Community. Journal of Social Distress and the Homeless, 1, 2, 157–176.
Levi, P. (1985/1991). Other people's trades (Trans. R. Raymond Rosenthal). London: Abacus Sphere Books Ltd.
Levi-Strauss, C. (1962/1966). The Savage Mind. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press. (Trans. G. Weidenfeld & Nicolson Ltd).
Liebes, T. & Katz, E. (1990/1994) The Export of meaning: Cross-Cultural Readings of Dallas (2nd ed). Cambridge: Polity press.
Lightfoot, C. (1997). The culture of adolescent risk-taking. New York/London: Guilford Press.
Lightfoot, C. & Cox, B. D. (1997). Locating competence: the sociogenesis of mind and the problem of internalization. In B. D. Cox & C. Lightfoot (Eds). Sociogenetic perspectives on internalization (pp. 1–21). Mahwah: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Livingstone, S. & Lunt, P. (1994). Talk on television: audience participation and public debate. London: Routledge.
Livingstone, S. (1998). Making sense of television. The psychology of audience interpretation. London / New York: Routledge.
Livingstone, S. (2002). Young people and new media: childhood and the changing media environment. London: Sage.
Lloyd, T. (1999). Reading for the future. Boys' and fathers' views on reading. London: Save the Children.
London, J. (1913/1994). Martin Eden. London: Penguin.
Marková, I. (2003). Dialogicality and social representations: The dynamics of mind. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Mathabane, M. (1986). Kaffir boy-Growing out of apartheid. London: Pan Books.
Matusov, E. (1998). When solo activity is not privileged: participation and internalization models of development. Human Development, 41, 326–349.
Mitchell, J. (2003). Siblings, sex and violence. Cambridge: Polity.
Moro, C. & Rodriguez, C. (1998). Towards a pragmatical conception of the object: The construction of the uses of the objects by the baby in the prelinguistic period. In M. D. P. Lyra & J. Valsiner (Eds.), Construction of Psychological Processes in Intepersonal Communication (pp. 53–72). Child development within culturally structured environements, Vol. 4. Norwood, N.J.: Ablex.
Najmambali, A. (2004). The morning after: travail of sexuality and love in modern Iran. International Journal of Middle East Studies, 36, 367–385.
Nathan, T. (1993).… . fier de n'avoir ni pays, ni amis, quelle sottise c'était. Grenoble: La Pensée Sauvage. [… Proud to have neither land, nor friends, how foolish it was…]
Nathan, T. (2001). Nous ne sommes pas seuls au monde. Paris: les empêcheurs de penser en rond. [We are not alone in the world].
Nelmes, J. (1996/2002). An introduction to film studies (2nd Ed.). London/New York: Routledge.
Nelson, K. (Ed.), (1989). Narratives from the crib. Cambridge, MA/London: Harvard University Press.
Nelson, K. (1996). Language in Cognitive development. Emergence of the mediated mind. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Neuman, Y. & Bekerman, Z. (2001). Cultural resources and the gap between educational theory and practice. The Teacher's College Record, 103, 3, 471–484.
Ochs, E. & Capps, L. (2001). Living narrative. Creating lives in everyday storytelling. Cambridge, MA/London: Harvard University Press.
Oz, A. (2003/2004). A tale of love and darkness. London: Chatto & Wintus.
Perret, J.-F. & Perret-Clermont, A.-N. (2001). Apprendre un métier technique dans un contexte de mutations technologiques. Fribourg (Switzerland): Éditions universitaires de Fribourg [Learning a technical trade in a context of technological mutation].
Perret-Clermont, A.-N., Perret, J.-F., & Bell, N. (1991). The social construction of meaning and cognitive activity in elementary school children. In L. B. Resnick, J. M. Levine, & S. D. Teasley (Eds.), Perspectives on socially shared cognition (pp. 41–62). Washington D.C.: American Psychological Association.
Perret-Clermont, A.-N. & Zittoun, T. (2002) Esquisse d'une psychologie de la transition. Education permanente. Revue Suisse pour la Formation Continue, 1, 12–15. [Sketch for a psychology of transitions].
Perriault, J. (1989). La logique de l'usage: essai sur les machines à communiquer. Paris: Flammarion. [The logic of use: essay on the communicating machines].
Piaget, J. (1945/1994). La formation du symbole chez l'enfant. Imitation, jeu et rêve, image et représentation. Lausanne: Delachaux & Niestlé. [The formation of symbol in the child. Imitation, play and dream, image and repre sentation].
Piaget, J. (1951). Play, dreams and imitation in childhood. Melbourne/London/Toronto: William Heinemann Ltd.
Psaltis, C. & Duveen, G. (2006). Social relations and cognitive development: The influence of conversation types and representations of gender. European Journal of Social Psychology, 36, 407–430,
Rabardel, P. & Waern, Y. (2003). Editorial. From artefact to instrument, Interacting with computers, 15, 641–645.
Rieger, A. & Tonard, J.-F. (Eds.). (1999). La lecture au féminin. La lectrice dans la littérature française du Moyen Age au XXème siècle. Darsmtadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellsgaft. [Feminine reading. The woman reader in French literature, from Middle Age to the 20th century].
Segal, H. (1991). Dream, Fantasy and Art. London/NY: Tavistock/Routledge.
Shweder, R. A. (1995). The confession of a methodological individualist. Culture & Psychology, 1, 1, 115–122.
Strauss, C. & Quinn, N. (1997). A cognitive theory of cultural meaning. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Taylor, M. (1999). Imaginary companions and the children who create them. New York/Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Tisseron, S. (1996). Secrets de famille mode d'emploi. Paris: Edition Ramsay. [Family secrets – instructions].
Tisseron, S. (2000). Enfants sous influence. Les écrans rendent-ils les jeunes violents? Paris: Armand Colin. [Children under influence. Do screen make youth violent?]
Tisseron, S. (2003). Comment Hitchcock m'a sauvé la vie. Paris: Armand Colin. [How Hitchcock saved my life].
Tomasello, M. (1999). The Cultural Origins of Human Cognition. Cambridge/London: Harvard University Press.
Toomela, A. (1996a). How culture transforms mind: A process of internalisation. Culture & Psychology. 2, 285–306.
Toomela, A. (1996b). What characterises language that can be interiorised, Culture & Psychology, 2, 319–322.
Tucker, N. (1981). The child and the book: a psychological and literary exploration. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Valsiner, J. (1997). Culture and the Development of Children's action. A Theory of Human Development (2nd Edition). New York/Chichester: John Wiley and Sons.
Valsiner, J. (1998). The guided mind. A sociogenetic approach to personality. Cambridge, MA/London: Harvard University Press.
Valsiner, J. (2000). Culture and human development. London/Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage
Valsiner, J. (2001). Process structure of semiotic mediation in human development. Human Development, 2 & 3, 84–97.
Valsiner, J. (2005). Soziale une emotionale Entwicklungsaufgaben im Kulturellen Kontext. In J. Asendorpf (Eds.). Soziale, emotionale une Persönlichketisentwicklung. (Vol 3) Entwicklungspychologie – Enzyklopädie der Psychologie (pp. 677–728). Göttingen: Hogrefe. [Social and emotional developmental tasks in cultural context].
Valsiner, J. & Sato, T. (2006). Historically Structured Sampling (HSS): How can psychology's methodology become tuned in to the reality of the historical nature of cultural psychology? In J. Straub, D. Weidemann, C. Kölbl & B. Zielke (Eds.), Pursuit of Meaning (pp. 215–251). Bielefeld: Transcript. Vygotsky, L. S (1928/1971). The psychology of art. Cambridge (MA)/London: MIT Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. & Luria, A. (1994). Tool and symbol in child development. In R. van der Veer & J. Valsiner (Eds.), The Vygotsky Reader (pp. 99–174). Oxford: Blackwell (Based on a 1930 English-language manuscript given by Luria to Michael Cole).
Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1963). Symbol formation. An organismic-developmental approach to language and the expression of thought. New York/London/Sidney: John Wiley and Sons.
Wertsch, J. V. (1991). Voices of the mind. London,/ Sidney/Singapore: Harvester Wheatsheaf.
Wertsch, J. V. (1993). Commentary [on Lawrence & Valsiner, 1993]. Human development, 36, 168–171.
Wertsch, J. V. (1998). Mind as Action. New York / Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Winnicott, D. W. (1971/2001). Playing and reality. Philadelphia/Sussex: Bruner-Routledge.
Winnicott, D. W. (1989). Psycho-analytic explorations. (Ed.) By C. Winnicott, R. Shepherd, M. Davis. London: H. Karnac.
Zagórska, W. & Tarnowski, A. (2004). Historical re-enactment in young adulthood: experiences and psychological functions. Poster presented at the XVI Biennial meeting, Ghent (Belgium), July 11–14.
Zittoun, T. (1996). Non sono tutti fascisti. Immagini di sé e degli altri nei ragazzi della scuola ebraica. La Rassegna Mensile di Israel, 62(3), 155–187. [They aint' all fascists! Images of self and other in children from a Jewish school].
Zittoun, T. (2003). The hidden work of symbolic resources in emotions. Culture & Psychology, 9, 313–329.
Zittoun, T. (2004). Symbolic competencies for developmental transitions: The case of the choice of first names. Culture & Psychology, 10, 161–171.
Zittoun, T. (2005). Donner la vie, choisir un nom. Engendrements symboliques. Paris: L'Harmattan. [Giving life, choosing a name. Symbolic begetting].
Zittoun, T. (2006a). Transitions. Development through symbolic resources. Greenwich (CT): Information Age Publishing, Inc.
Zittoun, T. (2006a). Difficult secularity: Talmud as symbolic resource. Outlines, 3, 59–75.
Zittoun, T. (2006b). Processes of interiority. In L. Simão & J. Valsiner (Eds). Otherness in Question: Development of the self. Advances in Cultural Psychology: Constructing Development. Greenwich, CT: Information Age Publishing, Inc.
Zittoun, T. & Cesari Lusso, V. (1998). Bagage culturel et gestion des défis identitaires. Cahiers de psychologie, 34 (Université de Neuchâtel), 1–63. [Cultural baggage and dealing with identity challenges].
Zittoun, T., Cornish, F., Gillespie, & Avelling, E.-L. (in press). Using social knowledge: A case study of a diarist's meaning making during World War II. In W. Wagner, T. Sugiman & K. Gergen (Eds.). Meaning in Action: Constructions, narratives and representations. New York: Springer.
Zittoun, T., Duveen, G., Gillespie, A., Ivinson, G. & Psaltis, C. (2003). The uses of symbolic resources in transitions. Culture & Psychology, 9, 415–448.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Abbey, E. & Valsiner, J. (2004 December). Emergence of meanings through ambivalence [58 paragraphs]. FQS: Forum Qualitative Sozialforschung [On-line Journal], 6(1), Art. 23. Available at http://www.qualitative-research.net/fqs-tests/1-05/05-1-23-e.htm
Baldwin, J. M. (1915). Genetic theory of reality. New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons.
Bergson, H. (1913). Time and free will. London: George Allen & Co.
Bergson, H. (1944). Creative evolution. New York: The Modern Library.
Eliot, T. S. (1932). “The Metaphysical Poets.” In Selected Essays, 1917–1932. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co.
Freeman, M. (2000). When the story's over: Narrative foreclosure and the possibility of self-renewal. In M. Andrews, S. D. Sclater, C. Squire, & A. Treacher (Eds.), Lines of narrative: Psychosocial perspectives. London: Routledge.
Freeman, M. (2002). The presence of what is missing: Memory, poetry, and the ride home. In R. J. Pellegrini & T. R. Sarbin (Eds.), Between fathers and sons: Critical incident narratives in the development of men's lives. New York: The Haworth Clinical Practice Press.
Josephs, I. E. (1998). Constructing one's self in the city of the silent: dialogue, symbols and the role of ‘as-if’ in self-development. Human Development, 41, 180–195.
Josephs, I. E., Valsiner, J., & Surgan, S. E. (1999). The process of meaning construction. In J. Brandtstatder and R. M. Lerner (Eds.), Action & self development (pp. 257–282). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Lewin, K. (1936). Principles of topological psychology. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company.
Matte Blanco, I. (1975). The unconscious as infinite sets. London: Duckworth.
Matte Blanco, I. (1988). Thinking, feeling and being. London: Routledge.
Paz, O. (1995). The double flame: Love and eroticism. New York: Harcourt Brace & Co.
Piaget, J. (1962). Play, dreams, and imitation in childhood. New York: Norton.
Prigogine, I. & Nicolis, G. (1971). Biological order, structure, and instabilities. Quarterly Journal of Biophysics, 4, 107–148.
Stevens, W. (1997). Wallace Stevens: Collected Poems & Prose. New York: Literary Classics of the United States, Inc.
Vaihinger, H. (1935). The philosophy of ‘as if’. (C. K. Ogden, Trans.). London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., Ltd.
Valsiner, J. (2005). Affektive Entwicklung im kulturellen Kontext. In J. B. Asendorpf (Hrg.), Soziale, emotionale und Persönlichkeitsentwicklung. Göttingen: Hogrefe.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1925/1971). Psychology of art. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Vygotsky, L. S., & Luria, A. R. (1930/1994). Tool and symbol in child development. In R. Van der Veer and J. Valsiner (Eds.), The Vygotsky reader. Oxford: Blackwell.
Zittoun, T., Duveen, G., Gillespie, A., Invison, G., & Psaltis, C. (2003). The uses of symbolic resources in developmental transactions. Culture & Psychology, 9, 415–448.
Zittoun, T. (2005). Transitions. Development through symbolic resources. Advances in Cultural Psychology: Constructing Development. Greenwich, CT: InfoAge.
Zittoun, T. (2006). The role of symbolic resources in human lives. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa, (Eds). Cambridge handbook of sociocultural Psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Acosta, J. de. (1572/1962). Historia natural y moral de las indias (2nd Ed.). México: Fondo de Cultura Económica.
Álvarez, A., & del Río, P. (1999). Cultural mind and cultural identity: Projects for life in body and spirit. In S. Chaiklin, M. Hedegaard, & U. J. Jensen (Eds.), Activity Theory and Social Practice: Cultural-Historical Approaches (pp. 302–324). Aarhus: Aarhus University Press.
Álvarez, A., del Río, P., & Guerrero, F. (1979). La vida en el Barrio. Sevilla: Prosevilla.
Bakhtin, M. (1986). Speech genres and other late essays. Austin: University of Texas Press.
Calderón de la Barca, P. (1635/1992). La vida es sueño. Madrid: Club Internacional del Libro.
Damasio, A. R. (1999). The feeling of what happens: Body and emotion in the making of consciousness. New York: Harcourt Brace.
Davidov, V. V., & Andronov, V. P. (1979). Origen de las acciones ideales: condiciones psicológicas de las mismas. Infancia y Aprendizaje, 10, 21–36.
del Río, P. (1987). El desarrollo de las competencias espaciales: el proceso de construcción de los instrumentos mentales. Unpublished doctoral dissertation, Universidad Complutense de Madrid.
del Río, P. (1990). La Zona de Desarrollo Próximo y la Zona Sincrética de Representación: El espacio instrumental de la acción social. Infancia y Aprendizaje, 51–52, 191–244.
del Río, P. (1997). Signos para la razón, signos para la emoción: pistas para el análisis cultural de protocolos. Comunicación y Cultura, 1–2, 85–118.
del Río, P. (2002). The external brain: Ecocultural roots of distancing and mediation. Culture and Psychology, 8(2), 233–265.
del Río, P. (2004). El arte es a la vida como el vino es a la uva. El papel del arte en la educación a la luz de la genética cultural. Cultura y Educación, 16(1–2), 43–64.
del Río, P. (2005). De bestias, personas y máquinas. Riesgo e incongruencia en el desarrollo humano. Invited address. IV Jornadas de Desarrollo Humano y Educación, Alcalá de Henares, 6–9 September.
del Río, P., & Álvarez, A. (1993). Programas infantiles de televisión: Analisis de líneas actuales y diseño estratégico de alternativas. Unpublished Research Report. Departamento de Estudios de TVE.
del Río, P., & Álvarez, A. (1995a). Directivity: The cultural and educational construction of morality and agency. Some questions arising from the legacy of L. S. Vygotsky. Anthropology and Education Quarterly, 26(4), 384–409.
del Río, P., & Álvarez, A. (1995b). Tossing, praying and reasoning: The changing architectures of mind and agency. In J. V. Wertsch, P. del Río, & A. Álvarez (Eds.), Sociocultural studies of mind (pp. 215–247). Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press.
del Río, P., & Álvarez, A. (1999). La puesta en escena de la realidad cultural. Una aproximación histórico cultural al problema de la etnografía audiovisual. Revista de Antropología Social, 8, 121–136.
del Río, P., & Álvarez, A. (in press-a). Inside and outside the Zone of Proximal Development. An eco-functional reading of Vygotsky. In H. Daniels, M. Cole & J. V. Wertsch (Eds.), The Cambridge Companion to Vygotsky. Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press.
del Río, P., & Álvarez, A. (Eds.) (in press-b). Escritos sobre arte y educación creativa de Lev S. Vygotsky. Madrid: Fundación Infancia y Aprendizaje.
del Río, P., Álvarez, A., & del Río, M. (2004). Pigmalión. Informe sobre el impacto de la televisión en la infancia. Madrid: Fundación Infancia y Aprendizaje/MEC.
del Río, P., & Fuertes, M. (2004). ¡Cámara! ¡Acción! Un análisis de la confrontación de la tipología industrial y la tipología dramática en el proceso de construcción de la realidad por el cine. Cultura y Educación, 16(1–2), 203–222.
Dennett, D. C. (1998). Brainchildren: Essays on designing minds. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Durkheim, E. (2003). Les formes élémentaires de la vie religieuse. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
Elias, N. (1978). The Civilizing Process. The History of Manners, Vol I. (E. Jephcott, trans.). Oxford, Blackwell/New York: Urizen Books.
Erickson, K. A., & Simon, H. A. (1980). Verbal reports as data. Psychological Review, 87, 215–251.
Erickson, K. A., & Simon, H. A. (1984). Protocol analysis. Verbal reports as data. Cambridge, MA: Bradford Books/MIT Press.
Erickson, K. A., & Simon, H. A. (1998). How to study thinking in everyday life: Contrasting think-aloud protocols with descriptions and explanations of thinking. Mind, Culture & Activity, 5(3), 178–186.
Febvre, L. (1953). Combats pour l'histoire, Paris: Armand Colin.
Foucault, M. (1969). L'Archéologie du savoir. Paris: Gallimard.
Fuertes, M., & del Río, P. (2004). El viento se llevó lo qué. Un análisis de la creación cultural y la construcción narrativa en el cine. Cultura y Educación, 16(1–2), 181–201.
del Río Galperin, P. Ia. (1976). Vredenie v Psijologuiv. Moscow: Moscow University.
Galperin, P. Ia. (1992a). Linguistic consciousness and some questions of the relationship between language and thought. Journal of Russian and East European Psychology, 30 (4), 81–92.
Galperin, P. Ia. (1992b). Stage-by stage formation as a method of psychological investigation. Journal of Russian and East European Psychology, 30 (4), 60–80.
Greeley, A. (1987). Mysticism goes mainstream. American Health, (January/February), 47–49.
Griffin, R., & Baron-Cohen, S. (2002). The intentional stance: Developmental and neurocognitive perspectives. In A. Brook, & D. Ross (Eds.), Daniel Dennett: Contemporary Philosophy in Focus (pp. 83–116). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Habermas, J. (1983). Moralbewusstein und Kommunikatives Handeln. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp.
Hood, R. W. (1975). The construction and preliminary validation of a measure of reported mystical experience. Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion, 14, 29–41.
Huston, A. C., & Wright, J. C. (1998). Mass media and children's development. In I. Sigel, & K. Renninger (Eds.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol 4. Child psychology in practice (pp. 999–1058). New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Hutchins, E. (1996). Cognition in the wild. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
James, W. (1890). Principles of psychology. New York: Henry Holt.
James, W. (1902). The varieties of religious experience. New York: Longmans, Green.
Lewin, K. (1926). Vorbemenkungen über die psychische Kräfte und Energien und über die Struktur der Seele. Psychologische Forschung, 7, 294–329.
López Aranguren, J. L. (1994). Obras Completas, Vol I: Filosofía y Religión. Madrid: Trotta.
Lotman, Y. M. (1990). Universe of the mind. A semiotic theory of the culture. London & New York: I. B. Tauris.
Lukoff, D. (1985). The diagnosis of mystical experience with psychotic features. Journal of Transpersonal Psychology, 17, 155–181.
Lukoff, D. (1998). From spiritual emergency to spiritual problem: The transpersonal roots of the new DSM-IV category. Journal of Humanistic Psychology, 38(2), 21–50.
Luria, A. R. (1966). Higher cortical function in man. New York: Basic Books.
Luria, A. R. (1972/2002). Language and organization of psychological processes. Lecture in the Department of Psychology, Moscow State University, 13th December, 1972. In K. Kashirskaya (Ed.), & M. Cole (Trans.), A memorial Disk for A. R. Luria's 100th Anniversary of the Birth. CDRom. The Fith Congress ISCRAT. Amsterdam, 2002.
Luria, A. R. (1973). The frontal lobes and the regulation of behavior. In K. H. Pribram, & A. R. Luria (Eds.). Psychophysiology of the frontal lobes (pp. 3–26). New York: Academic Press.
Luria, A. R. (1978). Investigaciones sobre la acción consciente en la primera infancia. Infancia y Aprendizaje, 1, 24–28.
Luria, A. R. (1979). Iazik i Soznanie (Language and consciousness). Moscow: Moscow State University.
Lutz, A., Greischar, L. L., Rawling, N. B., Ricard, M., & Davidson, R. J. (2004). Long-term meditators self-induce high-amplitude gamma synchrony during mental practice. PNAS, 101 (46), 16369–16373.
McCullough, M. E., Larson, D. B., Koenig, H. G., & Lerner, R. (1999). The mismeasurement of religion: a systemic review of mortality research. Mortality, 4, 83–194.
Moles, A. (1974). La communication. Paris: Marabout.
Nikkel, D. (2005). Humanity and Divinity as Radically Embodied. Paper presented at “Science and Religion: Global Perspectives”, June 4–8, Philadelphia (www.metanexus.net).
Ornstein, R. E. (1977). The Psychology of Consciousness. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Rodrigues, D., & del Río, P. (Eds.) (2000). The Religious Phenomenon: An interdisciplinary approach. Madrid: Fundación Infancia y Aprendizaje.
Rodríguez Arocho, W. (2004). Una aproximación al estudio del funcionamiento ejecutivo y el lenguaje en el trastorno por déficit de atención e hiperactividad desde su complejidad. Revista IRICE, 18, 51–68.
Sacks, O. (1996). An Anthropologist on Mars. New York: Random House.
Shank, R. (1982). Dynamic memory. Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press.
Smagorinsky, P. (1998). Thinking and Speech and Protocol Analysis. Mind, Culture & Activity, 5(3), 157–177.
de Unamuno, M. (1910). Mi religión y otros ensayos breves. Madrid: Renacimiento.
de Unamuno, M. (1913). Del sentimiento trágico de la vida en los hombres y en los pueblos. Madrid: Renacimiento.
de Unamuno, M. (1933). San Manuel Bueno, mártir, y tres historias más. Madrid: Espasa Calpe.
de Unamuno, M. (1986). Diario íntimo. Madrid: Alianza.
de Unamuno, M. (1990). Cómo se hace una novela. Madrid: Alianza [o.v. 1927].
Valsiner, J. (2002). Comparative study of human cultural development. Madrid: Fundación Infancia y Aprendizaje.
Varela, F., Thompson, E., & Rosch, E. (1991). The embodied mind: Cognitive science and human experience. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
von Uexküll, J. (1909). Umwelt und Innenwelt der Tiere. Berlin: J. Springer
Vygotsky, L. S. (1926/1982/1990). Prólogo a la edición rusa del libro de E. Thorndike “Principios de enseñanza basados en la psicología”. In A. Álvarez, & P. del Río. (Eds.), L. S. Vygotsky. Obras Escogidas, Vol. I. Problemas teóricos y metodológicos de la psicología (pp. 143–162). (Trans. José María Bravo). Madrid: Visor Distribuciones.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1930/1984/1999). Tool and sign in the development of the child. In R. W. Rieber. (Ed.), The Collected Works of Vygotsky, Vol 6. Scientific Legacy (pp. 1–68) (Trans. Marie Hall). New York: Kluwer/Plenum.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1931/1983/1995). Historia del desarrollo de las funciones psíquicas superiores. In A. Álvarez, & P. del Río. (Eds.), L. S. Vygotsky. Obras Escogidas, Vol. III. Problemas teóricos y metodológicos de la psicología (pp. 9–340). (Trans. Lydia Kuper). Madrid: Visor Distribuciones.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1934/1982/1987). Thinking and Speech. In R. W. Rieber, & A. S. Carton. (Eds.), The Collected Works of Vygotsky, Vol 1. Problems of General Psychology (pp. 3–68) (Trans. Norris Minick). New York and London: Plenum.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1971). The Psychology of Art. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1980). Fragmento de los apuntes de L. S. Vygotsky para unas conferencias de psicología de los párvulos. In D. B. Elkonin, Psicología del juego (pp. 269–276). Madrid: Pablo del Río Editor.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1989). Concrete human psychology. Soviet Psychology, 27 (2), 53–77.
Vygotsky, L. S., & Luria, A. (1994). Tool and symbol in child development. In R. van der Veer & J. Valsiner. (Eds.), The Vygotsky Reader (pp. 99–176). Oxford, UK: Basil Blackwell.
Wallon, H. (1934). Les origines du caractère chez l'enfant. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
Wright, J. R. & Huston, A. C. (1995). Effects of Educational TV Viewing of Lower Income Preschoolers on Academic Skills, School Readiness, and School Adjustment. One to Three Years Later: A Report to Children's Television Workshop. Austin, TX: Center for Research on the Influence of Television on Children (CRITC).
Wundt, W. (1900–1920). Völkerpsychologie, 10 volumes, Leipzig: Kröner-Engelmann.
Zaporozhets, A. V. (1967). Vospratie i deistvie (Perception and action). Moscow: Prosveschenie.
Zaporozhets, A. V., Zinchenko, V. P., & Elkonin, D. B. (1964). The development of visual-motor thinking during the preschool age. In A. V. Zaporozhets, & D. B. Elkonin. (Eds.), The psychology of preschool child (pp 208–231). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Zinchenko, V. P. (1995). Cultural-historical psychology and the psychological theory of Activity: Retrospect and prospect. In J. V. Wertsch, P. del Río, & A. Álvarez (Eds.). Sociocultural studies of mind (pp. 37–55). Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Arnett, J. J. (2004). Emerging adulthood: the winding road from the late teens and twenties. New York: Oxford University Press.
Bauman, Z. (2002). Individually, together. Foreword to U. Beck, & E. Beck-Gernsheim, (2002). Individualization (pp. ⅹⅳ–ⅹⅸ). London: Sage.
Beck, U. (2002). A life of one's own in a runaway world. In U. Beck & E. Beck-Gernsheim, E. (2002). Individualization (pp. 22–29). London: Sage.
Beck, U., & Beck-Gernsheim, E. (2002). Individualization. London: Sage.
Beck-Gernsheim, E. (1983). Vom “Dasein für andere” zum Anspruch auf ein Stück “eigenes Leben” – Individualisierungsprozesse im weillichen Lebenszusammenhang. Soziale Welt, 3, 307–341.
Budgeon, S. (2003). Choosing a self: young women and the individualization of identity. Westport, Conn.: Praeger.
Chandler, M. J., Lalonde, C. E., Sokol, B. W., & Hallett, D. (2003). Personal persistence, identity development, and suicide. Monograph of the Society of Research in Child Development, 68 (2, Series No. 273).
Chatterjee, P., Bailey, D., & Aronoff, N. (2001). Adolescence and old age in twelve communities. Journal of Sociology and Social Welfare, 28(4), 121–159.
Cole, M. (1996). Cultural psychology: A once and future discipline. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Côté, J. E. (2000). Arrested adulthood: The changing nature of maturity and identity. New York: New York University Press.
Côté, J. E., & Levine, C. G. (2002). Identity formation, agency and culture. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum & Associates.
Davis, M. (2003). Addressing the needs of youth in transition to adulthood. Administration and policy in mental health, 30(6), 495–509.
Dwyer, P., & Wyn, J. (2001). Youth, education and risk: Facing the future. London: Routledge/Falmer.
Falmagne, R. J. (2004). On the constitution of “self” and “mind.” Theory and Psychology, 14(6), 822–845.
Funder, A. (2002). Stasiland. London: Granta.
Ferguson, H. (2001). Social work, individualization and life politics. British Journal of Social work, 31, 41–55.
Furlong, A., & Cartmel, F. (1997). Young people and social change: Individualization and risk in late modernity. Buckingham: Open University Press.
Furstenberg, F. F. Jr., Rumbat, R. G., & Settersten, R. A. (2005). On the frontier of adulthood: Emerging themes and new directions. In Settersten, R. A., Furstenberg, F. F. Jr., & Rumbat, R. G. (Eds.), On the frontier of adulthood: Theory, research and public policy (pp. 3–25). Chicago: Chicago University Press.
Giddens, A. (1991). Self-identity and modernity. London: Polity.
Hearth, A. H., Delany, S., & Delany, A. E. (1993). Having our say: The Delany sisters' first 100 years. New York: Kodansha International.
Herriot, P., & Scott-Jackson, W. (2002). Globalization, social identities and employment. British Journal of Management, 13, 249–257.
Hettige, S. T. (2005). Demographic and economic pressures to move: Youth aspirations and livelihood opportunities for youth in the liberal economic environment of Sri Lanka. In F. Gale & S. Fahey (Eds.), Youth in transition: The challenges of generational change in Asia (pp. 227–241). Bangkok: Regional Unit for Social and Human Sciences in Asia and the Pacific, UNESCO.
Hitzler, R. (1988). Kleine lebenswelten – EinBeitrag zum verstehen von kultur. Opladen: Westdeutscher Verlag.
Lansdown, G. (2004). World youth report, 2003. New York: United Nations.
Lawrence, J. A., Benedikt, R., & Valsiner, J. (1992). Homeless in the mind: A case-history of personal life in and out of a close orthodox community. Journal of Social Distress and Homelessness, 1(2), 157–176.
Lawrence, J. A., & Valsiner, J. (1993). Conceptual roots of internalization: from transmission to transformation. Human Development, 36(3), 150–167.
Lawrence, J. A., & Valsiner, J. (2003). Making personal sense: An account of basic internalization and externalization processes. Theory and Psychology, 13(6), 723–752.
Lewin, K. (1936). Principles of topological psychology. New York: McGraw-Hill.
McDougall, W. (1945/1908). Social psychology. London: Methuen. Originally published in 1908.
Maguire, M., Ball, S. J., & Macrae, S. (2001). Post-adolescence, dependence and the refusal of adulthood. Discourse: Studies in the Cultural politics of education, 22(2), 197–211.
Marcia (2003). Treading fearlessly: A commentary on personal persistence, identity development, and suicide. Monograph of the Society of Research in Child Development, 68 (2, Series No. 273), pp. 131–138.
Moscovici, S. (1976). Society against nature: The emergence of human societies. Atlantic Highlands, N.J.: Humanities Press.
Norman, D. A. (1988). The psychology of everyday things. New York: Basic Books.
Puyat, J. H. (2005). The Filipino youth today: Their strengths and the challenges they face. In F. Gale, & S. Fahey (Eds.), Youth in transition: The challenges of generational change in Asia (pp. 191–205). Bangkok: Regional Unit for Social and Human Sciences in Asia and the Pacific, UNESCO.
Riegel, K. F. (1979). Foundations of dialectical psychology. New York: Academic Press.
Sawyer, R. K. (2002). Unresolved tensions in sociocultural theory: Analogies with contemporary sociological debate. Culture and Psychology, 8(3), 283–305.
Shanahan, M. J. (2000). Pathways to adulthood in changing societies: Variability and mechanisms in life course perspective. Annual review of Sociology, 26, 667–692.
Shore, B. (1996). Culture in mind: Cognition, culture and the problem of meaning. New York: Oxford University Press.
Teese, R. (2005). For which young people do schools work really well? In S. Richardson, & M. Prior (Eds.), No time to lose: The well-being of Australia's children (pp. 240–254). Melbourne: Melbourne University Press.
Valsiner, J. (1987). Culture and the development of children's action: A cultural-historical theory of developmental psychology. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
Valsiner, J. (1989). Human development and culture. Lexington MA: D. C. Heath.
Valsiner, J. (1998). Dualisms displaced: From crusades to analytic distinctions. Human Development, 41, 350–354.
Valsiner, J., & Lawrence, J. A. (1997). Human development in culture across the life span. In J. W. Berry, P. R. Dasen, & T. S. Saraswathi (Eds.), Handbook of cross-cultural psychology. Vol. 2. Basic processes and developmental psychology. 2nd ed. (pp. 69–106) Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Weinstein, D., & Bell, R. M. (1982). Saints and society: The two worlds of Western Christendom, 1000 to 1700. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Andersen-Slosberg, E. (1990). Speaking with style: The sociolinguistic skills of children. London: Routledge.
Aronsson, K., & Thorell, M. (2002). Voice and collusion in adult-child talk: Toward an architecture of intersubjectivity. In: S. Blum-Kulka & C. Snow (Eds.), Talking to adults (pp. 277–295). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Aston, G. (1988). Learning Comity: An approach to the description and pedagogy of interactional talk. Bologna: Editrice Clueb.
Blum-Kulka, S. (2005). Modes of meaning making in young children's conversational narratives. In: J. Thornborrow & J. Coates (Eds.), The Sociolinguistics of narrative (pp. 149–170). Antwerp: John Benjamins.
Blum-Kulka, S. (1997). Dinner Talk: Cultural patterns of sociability and socialization in family discourse. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Blum-Kulka, S., Huck-Taglicht, D., & Avni, H. (2004). The social and discursive spectrum of peer talk. Discourse Studies, 6, 307–328.
Blum-Kulka, S., & Snow, C. (Eds.), (2002). Talking with adults: The contribution of multi-party talk to language development. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Bordeaux, M. A., & Willbrand, M. L. (1987). Pragmatic development in children's telephone discourse. Discourse Processes, 10, 253–266.
Cekaite, A., & Aronsson, K. (2004). Repetition and joking in children's second language conversations: Playful recyclings in an immersion classroom. Discourse Studies, 6, 373–392.
Cheshire, J. (1991). Variation in the use of ain't in an urban British English dialect. In: P. Chambers & J. K. Trudgill. (Eds.), Dialects of English: Studies in grammatical variation (pp. 54–73). London: Longman.
Clancy, P. (1986). The acquisition of communicative style in Japanese. In: B. B. Schieffelin & E. Ochs. (Eds.), Language socialization across cultures (pp. 213–251). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Corsaro, W. A. (1985). Friendship and peer culture in the early years. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
Corsaro, W. A., & Johannesen, B. O. (2006). The creation of new cultures in peer interaction. In: J. Valsiner & A. Rosa. (Eds.), Cambridge handbook of socio-cultural psychology (pp. 458–459). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Corsaro, B., & Rizzo, T. (1990). Disputes in the peer culture of American and Italian nursery-school children. In: A. Grimshaw. (Ed.), Conflict talk (pp. 21–67). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Dorval, B., & Eckerman, C. O. (1984). Developmental trends in the quality of conversation achieved by small groups of acquainted peers. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, 49, Serial #206.
Dumesnil, J., & Dorval, B. (1989). The development of talk-activity frames that foster perspective-focused talk among peers. Discourse Processes, 12, 193–225.
Eckert, P. (1989). Jocks and burnouts: Social categories and identity in high school. New York: Teacher College Press.
Edelsky, C. (1981). Who's got the floor?. Language in Society, 10, 383–423.
Eggins, S., & Slade, D. (1997). Analyzing casual conversation. London: Cassell.
Ervin-Tripp, S. (1979). Children's verbal turn-taking. In: E. Ochs & B. Schieffelin. (Eds.), Developmental pragmatics (pp. 391–414). New York: Academic Press.
Faris, C. S. P. (2000). Cross-sex peer conflict and the discursive production of gender in a Chinese preschool in Taiwan. Journal of Pragmatics, 32, 539–569.
Fine, J. (1978). Conversation, cohesive and thematic patterning in Children's dialogues. Discourse Processes, 1, 247–266.
Gallagher, T. M., & Craig, H. K. (1982). An investigation of overlap in children's speech. Journal of Psycholinguistic Research, 11, 63–75.
Garvey, C. (1975). Requests and responses in children's speech. Journal of Child Language, 2, 41–63.
Garvey, C., & Berninger, G. (1981). Timing and turn-taking in children's conversations. Discourse Processes, 4, 27–57.
Goffman, E. (1981). Forms of talk. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
Goodwin, C. (1987). Forgetfulness as an interactive resource. Social Psychology Quarterly, 50, 115–131.
Goodwin, C. (2000). Action and embodiment within situated human interaction. Journal of Pragmatics, 32, 1489–1522.
Goodwin, M. H. (1990). He-said-she-said: Talk as social organization among Black children. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.
Goodwin, M. H. (2002). Building power asymmetries in girls' interaction. Discourse & Society, 13, 715–730.
Gurevitch, Z. D. (1990). The dialogic connection and the ethics of dialogue. British Journal of Sociology, 41, 181–196.
Habib, T., Hamo, M., Huck-Taglicht, D., & Blum-Kulka, S. (2002). Peer talk: Children's explanations in natural discourse. Paper presented at the joint conference of the 9th Congress of the International Association for the study of Child Language and the 23rd Annual Symposium on Research in Child Language Disorders, Wisconsin-Madison, July 2002.
Hamo, M., Blum-Kulka, S., & Hacohen, G. (2004). From observation to transcription and back: Theory, practice and interpretation in the analysis of children's naturally occurring discourse. Research on Language and Social Interaction, 37, 71–92.
Hemphill, L. (1989). Topic development, syntax and social class. Discourse Processes, 12, 267–286.
Hemphill, L., & Siperstein, G. N. (1990). Conversational competence and peer response to mildly retarded children. Journal of Educational Psychology, 82, 128–134.
Hoyle, S. M. (1998). Register and footing in role play. In: M. S. Hoyle & C. Adgerdr Temple. (Eds.), Kids talk (pp. 47–68). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Hoyle, M. S., & Adger Temple, S. (1998). Introduction. In: M. S. Hoyle & C. Adgerdr Temple. (Eds.), Kids talk (pp. 3–23). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Hughes, C., & Dunn, J. (1998). Understanding mind and emotion: Longitudinal associations with mental-state talk between young friends. Developmental Psychology, 34, 1026–1037.
Jones, R., & Thornborrow, J. (2004). Floors, talk and the organization of classroom activities. Language in Society, 33, 399–423.
Katriel, T. (1991). Communal webs: Communication and culture in contemporary Israel. New York: State University of New York Press.
Katz, J. R. (2004). Building peer relationships in talk: Toddlers' peer conversations in childcare. Discourse Studies, 6, 329–446.
Kay, K., & Charney, R. (1981). Conversational asymmetry between mothers and children. Journal of Child Language, 8, 35–50.
Keenan, E. O. (1974). Conversational competence in children. Journal of Child Language, 1, 163–184.
Kirschenblatt-Gimblett, B. (1979). Speech play and verbal art. In: B. Sutton-Smith. (Ed.), Play and learning (pp. 219–238). Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
Kochman, T. (1986). Strategic ambiguity in Black speech genres: Cross-cultural interference in participant-observation research. Text, 6, 153–70.
Kyratzis, A. (1999). Narrative identity: Preschoolers' self-construction through narratives in same-sex friendship group pragmatic play. Narrative Inquiry, 9, 427–457.
Linell, P. (1998). Approaching dialogue: Talk, interaction and contexts in dialogical perspectives. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Linell, P., & Korolija, N. (1997). Coherence in multi-party conversation: Episodes and contexts in interaction. In: T. Givon. (Ed.), Conversation: Cognitive, communicative and social perspectives. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
McTear, M. (1985). Children's conversation. Ox ford: Blackwell.
Moerman, M. (1990/1991). Exploring talk and interaction. Research on Language and Social Interaction, 24, 173–187.
Nelson, K., & Gruendel, J. (1979). At morning it's lunchtime: A scriptal view of children's dialogues. Discourse Processes, 2, 73–94.
Ninio, A., & Snow, C. (1996). Pragmatic development. Boulder, Colorado: Westview.
Richards, B., & Gallaway, C. (Eds.), (1994). Input and interaction in language acquisition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Rogoff, B. (1990). Apprenticeship in thinking: Cognitive development in social context. New York: Oxford University Press.
Sacks, H., Schegloff, E. A., & Jefferson, G. (1974). A simplest systematic for the organization of turn-taking for conversation. Language, 50, 696–735.
Sanders, R., & Freeman, K. E. (1998). Children's neo-rhetorical participation in peer interaction. In: I. Hutchby & J. Moran-Ellis. (Eds.), Children and social competence: Arenas of action (pp. 87–115). London: The Palmer Press.
Sawyer, R. K. (1997). Pretend play as improvisation. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Schieffelin, B., & Ochs, E. (Eds.), (1984). Language socialization across cultures. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Schley, S., & Snow, C. (1992). The conversational skills of school-age children. Social Development, 1, 18–35.
Schober-Peterson, D., & Johnson, C. J. (1989). Conversational topics of 4-year-olds. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 32, 857–870.
Schober-Peterson, D., & Johnson, C. J. (1993). The performance of eight- to ten-year-olds on measures of conversational skillfulness. First Language, 13, 249–269.
Snow, C. (1977). The development of conversation between mothers and babies. Journal of Child Language, 11, 423–452.
Snow, C. (1984). Parent-child interaction and the development of communicative ability. In: R. Schiefelbush & J. Pickar. (Eds.), Communicative competence: Acquisition and intervention (pp. 69–107). Baltimore, MD: University Park Press.
Szymanski, M. H. (1999). Re-engaging and dis-engaging talk in activity. Language in Society, 28, 1–23.
Tannen, D. (1984). Conversational style: Analyzing talk among friends. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
Trevarthen, C., & Hubley, P. (1978). Secondary intersubjectivity: Confidence, confiding and acts of meaning in the first year. In: A. Lock. (Ed.), Action, gesture and symbol: The emergence of language (pp. 183–229). London: Academic Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Bruner, J., & Sherwood, V. (1976). Peekaboo and the learning or rule structure. In J. Bruner, A. Jolly, & K. Sylva (Eds.), Play: Its role in development and evolution (pp. 277–285). New York: Basic Books.
Corsaro, W. (1985). Friendship and peer culture in the early years. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
Corsaro, W. (1990). The underlife of the nursery school: Young children's social representations of adult rules. In G. Duveen & B. Lloyd (Eds.), Social representations and the development of knowledge (pp. 11–26). Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.
Corsaro, W. (1992). Interpretive reproduction in children's peer cultures. Social Psychology Quarterly, 55, 160–177.
Corsaro, W. (1994). Discussion, debate, and friendship: Peer discourse in nursery schools in the US and Italy. Sociology of Education, 67, 1–26.
Corsaro, W. (1997). “Forward” to R. Keith Sawyer. Pretend play as improvisation. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Corsaro, W. (2003). “We're friends, rights?: Inside kid's culture. Washington, D.C.: Joseph Henry Press.
Corsaro, W. (2004). Process approaches to children's friendships: What we know and where we are going. International Society for the Study of Behavioural Development Newsletter, 46, 14–16.
Corsaro, W. (2005). The sociology of childhood 2nd edition. Thousand Oaks, CA: Pine Forge Press.
Corsaro, W., & Eder, D. (1990). Children's peer cultures. Annual Review of Sociology, 16, 197–220.
Corsaro, W., & Molinari, L. (1990). From seggiolini to discussione: The generation and extension of peer culture among Italian preschool children. International Journal of Qualitative Studies in Education, 3, 213–230.
Corsaro, W., & Molinari, L. (2005). I compagni: Understanding children's transition from preschool to elementary school. New York: Teachers College Press.
Corsaro, W. & Rizzo, T. (1988). Discussione and friendship: Socialization processes in the peer culture of Italian nursery school children. American Sociological Review, 53, 879–894.
de Hann, D., & Singer, E. (2001). Young children's language of togetherness. International Journal of Early Years Education, 9, 117–124.
Evaldsson, A. (1993). Play, disputes, and social order: Everyday life in two Swedish after-school centers. Linköping, Sweden: Linköping University.
Fine, G. (1987). With the boys: Little league baseball and preadolescent culture. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Goffman, E, (1961). Asylums. Garden City, NJ: Anchor.
Goldman, L. (1998). Child's play: Myth, mimesis, and make-believe. New York: Oxford University Press.
Goodwin, M. (1990). He-said-she-said: Talk as social organization among black children. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.
Hadley, K. (2003). Children's word play: Resisting and accommodating Confucian values in a Taiwanese kindergarten classroom. Sociology of Education, 76, 193–208.
James, A., Jenks, C., & Prout, A. (1998). Theorizing childhood. New York: Teachers College Press.
Johannesen, B. (2004). On shared experiences and intentional actions emerging within a community of Lego-playing children. Paper Presented at the Third International Conference on the Dialogical Self. Warsaw, Poland.
Katz, J. (2004). Building peer relationships in talk: Toddlers' peer conversations in childcare. Discourse Studies, 6, 329–346.
Kawamura, S. (1959). The process of sub-culture propagation among Japanese macaques. Primates, 2, 43–60.
Løkken, G. (2000). Tracing the social “style” of toddler peers. Scandinavian Journal of Educational Research, 2, 163–176.
Mayall, B. (2002). Towards a sociology of childhood: Thinking from children's lives. Philadelphia: PA: Open University Press.
Mussati, T., & Panni, S. (1981). Social behavior and interaction among day care center toddlers. Early Child Development and Care, 7, 5–27.
Nasaw, D. (1985). Children of the city. New York: Anchor.
Qvortrup, J. (1991). Childhood as a social phenomenon – An introduction to a series of national reports. Eurosocial Report No. 36. Vienna, Austria: European Centre for Social Welfare Policy and Research.
Rogoff, B. (1995). Observing sociocultural activity on three planes: Participatory appropriation, guided participation, and apprenticeship. In J. Wertsch, P. Del Rio & A. Alvarez (Eds.), Sociocultural studies of mind (pp. 139–164). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Rogoff, B. (1996). Developmental transitions in children's participation in sociocultural activities. In A. Sameroff & M. Haith (Eds.), The Five to Seven Year Shift (pp. 273–294). Chicago: University of Chicago Press
Rogoff, B. (2003). The cultural nature of human development. New York: Oxford.
Sawyer, R. K. (1997). Pretend play as improvisation: Conversation in the preschool classroom. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Sawyer, R. K. (1999). The emergence of creativity. Philosophical Psychology, 12, 447–469.
Sawyer, R. K. (2002). Improvisation and narrative. Narrative Inquiry, 12, 319–349.
Schwartzman, H. (1978). Transformations: The anthropology of children's play. New York: Plenum.
Silverstein, M. (1993). Metapragmatic discourse and metapragmatic function. In J. Lucy (Ed.), Reflexive language (pp. 33–58). Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.
Singer, D., & Singer, J. (1990). The house of make-believe: Play and the developing imagination. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Stamback, M., & Verba, M. (1986). Organization of social play among toddlers: An ecological approach. In E. Mueller & C. Cooper (Eds.), Process and outcome in peer relationships (pp. 229–247). New York: Academic Press.
Strandell, H. (1994). What are children doing? Activity profiles in day care centres. Paper presented at the XIII World Congress of Sociology, Bielefeld, Germany.
Thorne, B. (1993). Gender play: Girls and boys in school. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers University Press.
Valsiner, J. (2000). Culture and human development. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Wertsch, J. (1995). The need for action in sociocultural research. In J. Wertsch, P. Del Rio & A. Alvarez (Eds.), Sociocultural studies of mind (pp. 56–74). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Willis, P. (1981). Learning to labour: How working class kids get working class jobs. New York: Columbia University Press.
Winterhoff, P. (1997). Sociocultural promotions constraining children's social activity: Comparisons and variability in the development of friendships. In J. Tudge, M. Shanahan & J. Valsiner (Eds.), Comparisons in human development: Understanding time and context (pp. 222–251). New York: Cambridge University Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Anderson, B. (1991). Imagined communities: Reflections on the origin and spread of nationalism (Rev. and extended Ed.). New York: Verso.
Argyris, C., & Schön, D. A. (1978). Organizational learning: A theory of action perspective. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Pub. Co.
Bakhtin, M. M. (1986). Speech genres and other late essays. Austin: University of Texas Press.
Bakhtin, M. M., & Emerson, C. (1999). Problems of Dostoevsky's poetics (Vol. 8). Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
Bateson, G. (1987). Steps to an ecology of mind: Collected essays in anthropology, psychiatry, evolution, and epistemology. Northvale, NJ: Aronson.
Bean, M. S. (1997). Talking with Benny: Suppressing or supporting learner themes and learner worlds?Anthropology & Education Quarterly, 28(1), 50–69.
Bereiter, C., & Engelmann, S. (1966). Teaching disadvantaged children in the preschool. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Bhabha, H. K. (1994). The location of culture. London; New York: Routledge.
Boykin, A. W. (1986). The triple quandary and the schooling of African-American children. In U. Neisser (Ed.), The school achievement of minority children: New perspectives (pp. 57–92). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Bradley, L. A., & Bradley, G. W. (1977). The academic achievement of Black students in desegregated schools: A critical review. Review of Educational Research, 47(3), 399–449.
Bruner, J. (1998). The cultural psychology of self construction. Paper presented at the The Fourth Congress of the International Society for Cultural Research and Activity Theory, Aarhus, Denmark.
Clifford, J. (2000). Taking identity politics seriously: “The contradictory, stony ground …” In P. Gilroy, L. Grossberg & A. McRobbie (Eds.), Without guarantees: Essays in honour of Stuart Hall (pp. 94–122). London: Verso.
Cole, M. (1996). Cultural psychology: A once and future discipline. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Cole, M., & Bruner, J. (1971). Cultural differences and inferences about cultural processes. American Psychologist, 26(10), 867–876.
D'Souza, D. (1995). The end of racism: Principles for a multiracial society ([Pbk. Ed.). New York: Free Press.
De Lone, R. H. (1979). Small futures: Children, inequality, and the limits of liberal reform (1st Ed.). New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Deitcher, D. (2001). Dear friends: American photographs of men together, 1840–1918. New York: Harry N. Abrams.
Delpit, L. D. (1995). Other people's children: Cultural conflict in the classroom. New York: New Press, distributed by W. W. Norton.
Dewey, J. (1925). Experience and nature. Chicago: Open Court Publishing Co.
Durkheim, E. (1966). The division of labor in society. New York: Free Press.
Fullan, M. (1993). Change forces: Probing the depth of educational reform. London, New York: Falmer Press.
Fuller, M. (1984). Black girls in a comprehensive school. In M. Hammersley & P. Woods (Eds.), Life in school: The sociology of pupil culture. Milton Keynes, UK: Open University Press.
Gould, S. J. (1996). The mismeasure of man (Rev. and expanded. Ed.). New York: Norton.
Gutierrez, K., Rymes, B., & Larson, J. (1995). Script, counterscript, and underlife in the classroom: James Brown vs. Board of Education. Harvard Education Review, 65(3), 445–472.
Heath, S. B. (1983). Ways with words: Language, life, and work in communities and classrooms. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Helfer, R. E. (1987). The developmental basis of child abuse and neglect: An epidemiological approach. In R. E. Helfer & R. S. Kempe (Eds.), The battered child (pp. 60–80). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Hochschild, A. (1998). King Leopold's ghost: A story of greed, terror, and heroism in colonial Africa. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin.
Hochschild, A. (2005). Bury the chains: Prophets, slaves, and rebels in the first human rights crusade. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
Hofstadter, R. (1955). Social Darwinism in American thought (Rev. Ed.). Boston: Beacon Press.
Kaplan, R. B. (1966). Cultural thought patterns in inter-cultural education. Language Learning, 16(1–2), 1–21.
Labaree, D. F. (1997). How to succeed in school without really learning: The credentials race in American education. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
Labov, W. (1972). Language in the inner city: Studies in the Black English vernacular. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
Ladson-Billings, G. (1994). The dreamkeepers: Successful teachers of African American children. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Latour, B. (1987). Science in action: How to follow scientists and engineers through society. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Latour, B. (1996). On interobjectivity. Mind, Culture and Activity, 3(4), 228–245.
Latour, B., & Woolgar, S. (1979). Laboratory life: The social construction of scientific facts. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications.
Lave, J. (1992). Word problems: A microcosm of theories of learning. In P. Light & G. Butterworth. (Eds.), Context and cognition: Ways of learning and knowing. (pp. 74–92). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Lee, C. D. (2003). Toward a framework for culturally responsive design in multimedia computer environments: Cultural modeling as a case. Mind, Culture and Activity, 10(1), 42–61.
Linger, D. T. (1994). Has culture theory last its minds?Ethos, 22(3), 284–315.
Luria, A. R. (1976). Cognitive development, its cultural and social foundations. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Matusov, E. (1996). Intersubjectivity without agreement. Mind, Culture, and Activity, 3(1), 25–45.
Matusov, E. (1998). When solo activity is not privileged: Participation and internalization models of development. Human Development, 41(5–6), 326–349.
Matusov, E. (1999). How does a community of learners maintain itself? Ecology of an innovative school. Anthropology & Education Quarterly, 30(2), 161–186.
Matusov, E. (2004). Bakhtin's debit in educational research: Dialogic pedagogy. Journal of Russian & East European Psychology, 42(6), 3–11.
Matusov, E., & Hayes, R. (2002). Building a community of educators versus effecting conceptual change in individual students: Multicultural education for preservice teachers. In G. Wells & G. Claxton. (Eds.), Learning for life in the 21st century: Sociocultural perspectives on the future of education (pp. 239–251). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Matusov, E., Pleasants, H., & Smith, M. P. (2003). Dialogic framework for cultural psychology: Culture-in-action and culturally sensitive guidance. Review Interdisciplinary Journal on Human Development, Culture and Education, 4(1), available online: http://cepaosreview.tripod.com/Matusov.html.
Matusov, E., & Rogoff, B. (2002). Newcomers and oldtimers: Educational philosophy-in-actions of parent volunteers in a community of learners school. Anthropology & Education Quarterly, 33(4), 1–26.
Matusov, E., Julien, St. J., & Hayes, R. (2005). Building a creole educational community as the goal of multicultural education for preservice teachers. In L. V. Barnes. (Ed.), Contemporary Teaching and Teacher Issues (pp. 1–38). Hauppauge, NY: Nova Publishers.
Matusov, E., & White, C. (1996). Defining the concept of open collaboration from a sociocultural framework. Cognitive Studies: The Bulletin of the Japanese Cognitive Science Society, 3(4), 11–13.
Mayerfeld Bell, M. (1998). Culture as dialogue. In M. Mayerfeld Bell & M. Gardiner (Eds.), Bakhtin and the human sciences: No last words (pp. 49–62). London: Sage.
Mayo, C. (2000). The use of Foucault. Educational Theory, 50(1), 103–116.
Mead, G. H. (1956). On social psychology. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Michaels, S., & Cazden, C. B. (1986). Teacher/ child collaboration as oral preparation for literacy. In B. B. Schieffelin & P. Gilmore. (Eds.), The acquisition of literacy: Ethnographic perspectives (pp. 132–154). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
Moll, L. C. (2000). Inspired by Vygotsky: Ethnographic experiments in education. In C. D. Lee & P. Smagorinsky. (Eds.), Vygotskian perspectives on literacy research: Constructing meaning through collaborative inquiry (pp. 256–268). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Moll, L. C., Amanti, C., Neff, D., & González, N. (1992). Funds of knowledge for teaching: Using a qualitative approach to connect homes and classrooms. Theory into Practice, 31(2), 132–141.
Mudgett-DeCaro, P. (1996). On being both Hearing and Deaf: My bicultural-bilingual experience. In I. Parasnis. (Ed.), Cultural and language diversity and the deaf experience (pp. 272–288). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Nieto, S. (1996). Affirming diversity: The sociopolitical context of multicultural education (2nd. Ed.). White Plains, NY: Longman Publishers.
Ogbu, J. U. (1978). Minority education and caste: The American system in cross-cultural perspective. New York: Academic Press.
Ogbu, J. U. (2003). Black American students in an affluent suburb: A study of academic disengagement Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Philips, S. U. (1993). The invisible culture: Communication in classroom and community on the Warm Springs Indian Reservation. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland Press.
Rogoff, B. (2003). The cultural nature of human development. New York: Oxford University Press.
Rogoff, B., Matusov, E., & White, C. (1996). Models of teaching and learning: Participation in a community of learners. In D. R. Olson & N. Torrance. (Eds.), The handbook of education and human development: New models of learning, teaching and schooling. (pp. 388–414). Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishers Inc.
Rogoff, B., Mistry, J., Göncü, A., & Mosier, C. (1993). Guided participation in cultural activity by toddlers and caregivers. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, 58(8), v-179.
Rueda, R., & Dembo, M. H. (1995). Motivational processes in learning: A comparative analysis of cognitive and sociocultural frameworks. In M. L. Maehr & P. R. Pintrich. (Eds.), Culture, motivation and achievement (Vol. 9, pp. 255–289). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press.
Rueda, R., & Moll, L. C. (1994). A sociocultural perspective on motivation. In H. F. O'Neil Jr. & M. Drillings. (Eds.), Motivation: Theory and research. (pp. 117–137). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Ryan, W. (1971). Blaming the victim. New York: Vintage Books.
Said, E. W. (1979). Orientalism (1st Vintage Books. Ed.). New York: Vintage Books.
Sherif, M. (1988). The Robbers Cave experiment: Intergroup conflict and cooperation. Middletown, CT: Wesleyan University Press.
Star, S. L., & Griesemer, J. R. (1989). Institutional ecology, “translations” and boundary objects: Amateurs and professionals in Berkeley's museum of vertebrate zoology, 1907–39. Social Studies of Science, 19(3), 387–420.
Tharp, R. G. (1982). The effective instruction of comprehension: Results and description of the Kamehameha Early Education Program. Reading Research Quarterly, 17(4), 503–527.
Varenne, H., & McDermott, R. P. (1998). Successful failure: The school America builds. Boulder, CO: Westview Press.
Vogt, L. A., Jordan, C., & Tharp, R. G. (1987). Explaining school failure, producing school success: Two cases. Anthropology & Education Quarterly, 18(4), 276–286.
Vygotsky, L. S., Luria, A. R., Golod, V. I., & Knox, J. E. (1993). Studies on the history of behavior: Ape, primitive, and child. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Wenger, E. (1998). Communities of practice: Learning, meaning, and identity. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Abulkhanova-Slavskaya, K. A. (1989). To Sergei Rubinstein birth centenary: A profile of Sergei Rubinstein's life and work. Soviet Journal of Psychology, 10(5), 16–28.
Ahonen, H., Engeström, Y., & Virkkunen, J. (2000). Knowledge management – the second generation: Creating competencies within and between work communities in the Competence Laboratory. In Y. Malhotra (Ed.), Knowledge management and virtual organizations (pp. 282–305). London: Idea Group Publishing.
Amano, K. (1999). Improvement of schoolchildren's reading and writing ability through the formation of linguistic awareness. In Y. Engeström, R. Mietinen, & R. L. Punamäki, (Eds.), Perspectives on activity theory (pp. 183–205). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Blanton, W. E., Moorman, G. B., Hayes, B. A., & Warner, M. L. (1997). Effects of participation in the 5th Dimension on far transfer. Journal of Educational Computing Research, 16(4), 371–96.
Brown, K. B., & Cole, M. (2004). A utopian methodology as a tool for cultural and critical psychologies: Toward a positive critical theory. In M. Packer & M. Tappan (Eds.), Cultural and critical perspectives on human development (pp. 41–65). Albany, NY: SUNY Press.
Cole, M. (1996). Cultural psychology: A once and future discipline. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Cole, M., & Subbotsky, E. (1993). The fate of stages past: Reflections on the heterogeneity of thinking from the perspective of cultural-historical psychology. Schweizerische Zeitschrift fur Psychologie, 52(2), 103–113.
Cole, M., & Distributed Literacy Consortium (2006). Creating and sustaining alternative educational activities: Diversity as a tool for educational design. New York: Russell Sage.
D'Andrade, R. (1984). Cultural meaning systems (1984). In R. A. Shweder & R. A. LeVine (Eds.), Culture theory: Essays on mind, self, and emotion (pp. 88–122). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Davydov, V. V. (1988a). Problems of developmental teaching. Soviet Education, 30(8), 15–97; 30(10), 3–77.
Davydov, V. V. (1988b). Problems of the child's mental development. Soviet Education, 30(8), 44–97.
Davydov, V. V. (1988c). The concept of developmental teaching. Journal of Russian and East European Psychology, 36(4), 11–36.
Elkonin, D. B. (1971). Toward the problem of stages in the mental development of the child. Soviet Psychology, 10, 538–553.
Engeström, Y. (1987). Learning by expanding: An activity-theoretical approach to developmental research. Helsinki: Orienta-Konsultit.
Engeström, Y. (1993). Developmental studies on work as a test bench of activity theory. In S. Chaiklin & J. Lave (Eds.), Understanding practice: Perspectives on activity and context (pp. 64–103). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Engeström, Y. (1999). Learning by expanding: Ten years later. Introduction. Lernen durch Expansion. Marburg: BdWi- Verlag.
Engeström, Y. (2001). (Ed.), Activity theory and social capital. Research Reports 5. Helsinki: Center for Activity theory and Developmental Work Research, University of Helsinki.
Engeström, Y. (2005). Developmental work research: Expanding activity theory in practice. Berlin: Lehmanns Media.
Engeström, Y., Engeström, R., & Kerosuo, H. (2003). The discursive construction of collaborative care. Applied Linguistics, Special Issue 24(3), 286–315.
Engeström, Y., Engeström, R., & Suntio, A. (2002). From paralyzing myths to expansive action: Building computer-supported knowledge work into the curriculum from below. In G. Stahl (Ed.), Computer support for collaborative learning: Foundations for a CSCL community (pp. 318–324). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Engeström, Y., Lompscher, J., & Rückriem, G. (Eds.). (2005). Putting activity theory to work: Contributions from developmental work research. Berlin: Lehmanns Media.
Engeström, Y., Miettinen, R., & Punamaki, R.-L. (Eds.). (1999). Perspectives on activity theory. Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press.
Engeström, Y., Pasanen, Toivainen, H., & Haavisto, V. (2005). Expansive learning as collaborative concept formation at work. In K. Yamazumi, Y. Engeström & H. Daniels (Eds.), New learning challenges: Going beyond the industrial age system of school and work (pp. 47–77). Osaka: Kansai University Press.
Engeström, Y., Virkkunen, J., Helle, M., Pihlaja, J., & Poikela, R. (1996). The Change laboratory as a tool for transforming work. Lifelong Learning in Europe, 1(2), 10–17.
Fine, G. A. (1987). With the boys: Little League baseball and preadolescent culture.Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Gaskins, S. (1999). Children's daily lives in a Mayan village: A case study of culturally constructed roles and activities. In A. Goncu, (Ed.), Children's engagement in the world: Sociocultural perspectives (pp. 25–60). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Goodenough, W. H. (1994). Toward a working theory of culture. In R. Borofsky (Ed.), Assessing cultural anthropology (pp. 262–273). New York: McGraw-Hill.
Griffin, P., & Cole, M. (1984). Current activity for the future: The zo-ped. In B. Rogoff & J. V. Wertsch (Eds.), Children's learning in the zone of proximal development: New directions for child development (No. 23). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Hartman, H. J. (Ed.), (2001). Metacognition in learning and instruction: theory, research and practice. Boston: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Hedegaard, M., & Chaiklin, S. (2005). Radical-local teaching and learning: A cultural-historical approach. Aarhus: Aarhus University Press.
Hedegaard, M., Chaiklin, S., & Jensen, U. J. (Eds.). (1999). Activity theory and social practice. Aarhus: Aarhus University Press.
Hedegaard, M., & Lompscher, J. (Eds.) (1999). Learning activity and development. Aarhus: Aarhus University Press.
Hiebert, J., Gallimore, R., Garnier, H., Given, K. B., Hollingsworth, H., Jacobs, J., et al. (2003). Teaching mathematics in seven countries: Results from the TIMSS 1999 video study. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Education.
Ilyenkov, E. V. (1982). The dialectics of the abstract and the concrete in Marx's ‘Capital’: Moscow: Progress.
Kaminski, P. H. (1994). Claiming our voices: A teaching/learning experiment. Journal of Feminist Studies of Religion, 10(1), 44–56.
Kaptelinin, V. (1996). Computer-mediated activity: Functional organs in social and developmental contexts. In B. Nardi. (Ed.), Context and consciousness: Activity theory and human-computer interaction (pp. 45–68). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.
Lee, C. D., Spencer, M. B., & Harpalani, V. (2003). “Every shut eye ain't sleep”: Studying how people live culturally. Educational Researcher, 32(5) 6–13.
Leontiev, A. N. (1978). Activity. Consciousness. Personality. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Leontiev, A. N. (1981). The problem of activity in psychology. In J. V. Wertsch (Ed.), The concept of activity in Soviet Psychology (pp. 37–71). White Plains, NY: Sharpe.
Lotman, Y. M. (1989). The semiosphere. Soviet Psychology, 27(1), 40–61.
Luria, A. R. (1928). The problem of the cultural development of the child. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 35, 493–506.
Luria, A. R. (1932). The nature of human conflicts. New York: Liverwright.
Luria, A. R. (1979). The making of mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Markova, A. K. (1979). The teaching and mastery of language. Armonk, NY: Sharpe.
Mayer, R. E., Schustack, M. W., & Blanton, W. E. (1999). What do children learn from using computers in an informal, collaborative setting? Educational Technology, 39(2), 27–31.
Nocon, H. D. (2004). Sustainability as process: Community education and expansive collaborative activity. Educational Policy, 18(5), 710–732.
Rogoff, B. (2003). The cultural nature of human development. New York: Oxford University Press.
Roth, W.-M., Hwang, S., Goulart, M. I. G., & Lee, Y. J. (2005). Participation, learning, and identity: A dialectical perspective. Berlin: Lehmanns Media.
Rubtsov, V. V. (1991). Learning in children: Oorganization and development of cooperation actions. New York: Nova Science Publishers.
Schmittau, J. (1993a). Connecting mathematical knowledge: A dialectical perspective. Journal of Mathematical Behavior, 12(2), 179–201.
Schmittau, J. (1993b). Vygotskian psychology and dialectical logic: A psychological-epistemological foundation for contemporary pedagogy. The Review of Education, 15, 13–20.
Schmittau, J. (2003). Cultural historical theory and mathematics education. In A. Kozulin, B. Gindis, S. Miller, & V. Ageyev. (Eds.), Vygotsky's educational theory in cultural context (pp. 225–245.). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Sherif, M., & Sherif, C. W. (1956). An outline of social psychology. New York: Harper.
van Der Veer, R., & Valsiner, J. (1991). Understanding Vygotsky. Oxford: Blackwell.
Vásquez, O. A. (2002). La Clase Mágica: Imagining Optimal Possibilities in a Bilingual Community of Learners. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Virkkunen, J., & Ahonen, H. (2004). Transforming learning and knowledge creation on the shop floor. International Journal of Human Resources Development and Management, 4, 57–72.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1929). The problem of the cultural development of the child, II. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 36, 414–434.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1978). Mind in society. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1927/1997). The historical meaning of the crisis in psychology: A methodological investigation. In R. W. Rieber & J. Wollock. (Eds.), The collective works of L. S. Vygotsky, Vol. 3: Problems of the theory and history of Psychology (pp. 233–243). New York: Plenum.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1997). The problem of consciousness. In R. W. Rieber & J. Wollock (Eds.) The collective works of L. S. Vygotsky, Vol. 3: Problems of the theory and history of Psychology (pp. 129–138). New York: Plenum.
Wertsch, J. V. (1985). Vygotsky and the social formation of mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Wertsch J. del Río, & Alvarez, A. (Eds.) (1995). Sociocultural studies of mind. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Yanchar, S. C. (2003). On methodological innovations in imagery research: Beyond the learning experiment? Journal of Mental Imagery, 27 (3& 4), 258–261.
Zinchenko, V. P. (1985). Vygotsky's ideas about units for the study of mind. In J. Wertsch. (Ed.), Culture, communication, and cognition: Vygotskian perspectives. New York, NY: Cambridge University Press.
Zuckerman, G. A. (1994). The child's initiative in building up cooperation: the key to problems of children's independence. In J. J. F. ter Laak, P. G. Heymans, & A. Podol'skij. (Eds.), Developmental tasks: Towards a cultural analysis of human development (pp. 125–140). Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic.
Zuckerman, G. A. (2003). The learning activity in the first years of schooling: The developmental path toward reflection. In A. Kozulin, B. Gintis, V. S. Ageev, & S. Miller. (Eds.), Vygotsky's educational theory in cultural context. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Zuckerman, G. A. (2005). The D. B. Elkonin-V. V. Davydov system as a resource for raising the competence of Russian schoolchildren. Problems of Psychology, (4) 84–95

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Bakeman, R., and Brownlee, J. R. (1982). Social rules governing object conflicts in toddlers and preschoolers. In Rubin, K. H. and Ross, H. S., (Eds.), Peer Relationships and Social Skills in Childhood (pp. 99–111). Springer-Verlag.
Bakhtin, M. M. (1981). The Dialogic Imagination: Four Essays by M. M. Bakhtin., (Ed.), M. Holoquist; trans. C. Emerson and M. Holoquist. Austin: University of Texas Press.
Belk, R. W. (1988). Possessions and the extended self. Journal of Consumer Research 15: 139–168.
Belk, R. W. (1991). The ineluctable mysteries of possessions. In Rudmin, F. W., (Ed.), To Have Possessions: A Handbook of Ownership and Property. Journal of Social Behavior and Personality. 6, 17–55.
Berti, A. E. and Bombi, A. S. (1988). The Child's Construction of Economics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Bourdieu, P. (1979). La Distinction: Critique Sociale du Jugement. Paris: Editions de Minuit.
Cole, M. (1996). Cultural Psychology; A Once and Future Discipline. The Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
Csikszentmihalyi, M. and Rochberg-Halton, Y. (1981). The Meaning of Things: Domestic Symbols and the Self. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Dittmar, H. (1992). The Social Psychology of Material Possessions: To Have is To Be. Hemel Hempstead: Harvester Wheatsheaf.
Dittmar, H. (1996). Adolescents' economic beliefs and social class. In Lunt. P. and Furnham, A., (Eds.), Economic Socialization of Children. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar.
Emler, N. and Dickinson, J. (1985). Children's representations of economic inequalities: the effect of social class. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 3, 191–198.
Emler, N. and Dickinson, J. (2004). Children's understanding of social class and occupational groupings. In Barrett, M. and Buchanan-Barrow, E., (Eds.), Children's Understanding of Society. Hove: Psychology Press.
Engeström, Y. (1987). Learning by Expanding: An activity-theoretical approach to developmental research. Helsinki: Orienta-Konsultit.
Friedman, M. (1953). Essays in Positive EconomicsChicago: University of Chicago Press.
Furnham, A. (1982). The perception of poverty among adolescents. Journal of Adolescence, 5, 135–147.
Furnham, A. (1999). Economic socialization: A study of adults' perceptions and uses of allowances (pocket money) to educate children. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 17, 585–604.
Furnham, A. and Cleare, A. (1988). School children's conceptions of economics: prices, wages, investments and strikes. Journal of Economic Psychology, 9, 467–479.
Furnham, A. and Jones, S. (1987). Children's view regarding possessions and their theft. Journal of Moral Education, 16, 18–30.
Furnham, A. and Kirkcaldy, B. (2000). Economic socialization: German parents' perceptions and implementation of allowances to educate children. European Psychologist, 5, 202–215.
Godlier, M. (1999). The enigma of the Gift. Cambridge, UK: Polity Press.
Harbaugh, W. T., Krause, K. and Liday, S. G. (2003). Bargaining by children. University of Oregon Economics Department Working Papers.
Imamura, H. (2000). Koueki suru Ningen: Zouyo to Koukan no Ningengaku [Homo Communicance: Philosophical Anthropology of Gift and Exchange]. Tokyo: Kodansha.
Issacs, S. (1967). Property and possessiveness. In Talbot, T. (Ed.), The World of the Child: Birth to Adolescence from the Child's Viewpoint. Garden City. New York: Doubleday & Co.
Jahoda, G. (1979). The construction of economic reality by some Glaswegian children. European Journal of Social Psychology. 9:115–127.
Jahoda, G. (1983). European ‘lag’ in the development of an economic concept: A study In Zimbabwe. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 1, 113–120.
James, W. 1890. The Principles of Psychology, vol. 1. New York: Henry Holt.
Kemptner, N. L. (1989). Personal possessions and their meanings in old age. In Spacapan S. and Oskamp, S., (Eds.), The Social Psychology of Aging (pp. 165–196). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Kawashima, T. (1981). Shoyukenpou no Riron [Theory of Property Law]. Tokyo: Iwanami Shoten.
Lassarres, D. (1996). Consumer education in French families and schools. In Lunt, P. and Furnham, A., (Eds.), Economic Socialization of Children. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar.
Lea, S. E. (1994). Rationality: the formalist view. In Brandstätter, H. and Güth W. (Eds.), Essays in Economic Psychology. Berlin: Springer.
Leahy, R. J. (1981). Development of the conception of economic inequality: II. Explanations, justifications and concepts of social mobility and change. Child Development, 19, 111–125.
Leiser, D. and Ganin, M. (1996). Economic participation and economic socialization. In Lunt, P. and Furnham, A., (Eds.), Economic Socialization of Children. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar.
Leiser, D., Sevón, G. and Lévy, D. (1990). Children's economic socialization: Summarizing the cross-cultural comparison of ten countries. Journal of Economic Psychology, 11, 591–614.
Matsumura, Y. (2005). Shoyuken no Sinrigaku [Psychology of ownership]. In Sugawara, I., Sato, T. and Kurosawa, K. (Eds.), Hou to Shinri no Furontia [Frontiers of Law and Psychology], 1, 35–57.
Mauss, M. (1954). The Gift: Form and Functions of Exchange in Archaic Societies. London: Cohen and West.
Mills, J. and Clark, M. S. (1982). Communal and exchange relationships. In Wheeler, L. (Ed.), Review Personality and Social Psychology III. Beverley Hills: Sage.
Mortimer, J. T., Dennehy, K., Lee, C. D. and Finch, M. D. (1994). Economic socialization in the American family. Family Relations, 43, 23–29.
Moscovici, S. (2001). Social Representations: Explorations in Social Psychology. New York, NY: New York University Press.
Murnighan, J. K. and Saxon, M. S. (1998). Ultimatum bargaining by children and adults. Journal of Economic Psychology, 19, 415–445.
Ng, S. H. (1983). Children's ideas about the bank and shop profit: Developmental stages and the influence of cognitive contrasts and conflict. Journal of Economic Psychology, 4, 209–221.
Oh, S. (2003). Kodomono Kozukai- Kaimono ni Miru Nikkan no Kotonaru Ronri[Different logics under shopping behaviors and pocket money among Japanese and Korean children]. AERA Mook: Shinrigaku ga Wakaru [Introduction to Psychology] (pp. 94–96). Tokyo: Asahi Shinbun.
Oh, S., Pian, C., Yamamoto, T., Takahashi, N., Sato, T., Takeo, K., Choi, S. and Kim, S. (2005). Money and the life worlds of children in Korea: Examining the phenomenon of Ogori (treating) from cultural psychological perspectives. Maebashi Kyoai Gakuen College Ronshu 5:73–88. http://www.kyoai.ac.jp/college/ronshuu/no-05/oh.pdf
Pian, C. and Yamamoto, T. (2001). Kodomo no Okozukai to Oyakokankei: Oya tono Mensetsuchosa kara [Children's pocket money and their relationship with parents: From the interviews with parents]. In Sogon, S. (Ed.), Bunka Tokuiteki Youiku Kodo to Kodomo no Kanjo Seigyo Kodo no Hattatsu: Sono Nittyu Hikaku [Culture Specific Parenting Style and Development of Children's Emotion Regulation: Comparison Between Japan and China]. Report for Grant in Aid of Ministry of Science and Education, 1998–2001.
Pian, C. and Yamamoto, T. (2005). How does children's pocket money become “my money”?; For understanding development of children's self-consciousness and “my money.” Paper presented at the first ISCAR conference, in Seville.
Polanyi, K. (1977). The Livelihood of Man. New York: Academic Press.
Sato, T., Takahashi, T. and Takeo, K. (2005). Okane wo Meguru Kodomo no Seikatsusekai: Seoul (5)[Children's money and their life-world: Seoul(5) an analysis of items about value judgments on pocket money]. In Nihon Shinri Gakkai Dai 69 Kai Taikai Hppyo Ronbunshu [Collected Papers for 69th Congress of Japan Society of Psychology].
Sevón, G. and Weckstrom, S. (1989). The development of reasoning about economic events: A study of Finnish children. Journal of Economic Psychology, 10, 495–514.
Simmel, G. (1950). The sociology of Georg Simmel. Wolff, K. H., trans. and (Ed.), New York: Free Press.
Strauss, A. L. (1952). The development and transformation of monetary meanings in the child. American Sociological Review, 53, 275–286.
Takahshi, N. (2005). Money as a cultural tool: Results of Japan, Korea, and Vietnam. Paper presented at the Joint Conference of Psychology in Japan and Vietnam in Hanoi, August 2005.
Takeo, K. (2005). Self-formation through the medium of allowance: Results of questionnaires research in Japan, Korea, and Vietnam. Paper presented at the First ISCAR Conference in Seville.
Uzawa, H. (1989). Keizaigaku no Kangaekata [The Way of Thinking in Economics]. Tokyo: Iwanami Shoten (Japanese).
Vygotsky, L. S. (1997). The instrumental method in psychology: Problems of the theory and history of psychology. In The Collected Works of L. S. Vygotsky, vol. 3 (Translated by Rene van der Veer). New York: Plenum Press.
Webley, P. and Lea, S. E. (1993a). Towards a more realistic psychology of economic socialization. Journal of Economic Psychology, 461–472.
Webley, P. and Lea, S. E. (1993b). The partial unacceptability of money in repayment for neighborly help. Human Relations, 46, 65–76.
Webley, P., Lea, S. E. and Portalska, R. (1983). The unacceptability of money as a gift. Journal of Economic Psychology, 4, 223–228.
Wertsch, J. V. (1998). Mind as Action. Oxford University Press.
Yamamoto, T. (1991a). “Shobunken” ni Kansuru Shogakusei no Shoyu Ishiki to Shinriteki Jiritsu [Possession consciousness in schoolchildren, and psychological weaning: why do Japanese children go against confusion principles?] Nara Joshi Daigaku Bunbakubu Kyoikugakka Nenpo [Annual Report of Educational Research Nara Women's University], 9, 93–113.
Yamamoto, T. (1991b). Yojiki ni Okeru “Sensen no Sontyo” Gensoku no Keisei to Sono Kinou [Establishment of the principle of “respect for occupancy” and its function in early children's group: On the problems of ontogeny of possession]. Kyouiku Shinrigaku Kenkyu [Japanese Journal of Educational Psychology], 39, 122–132.
Yamamoto, T. (1992). Shogakusei to Okozukai [Primary school students and their pocket money]. Hattatu 51:68–76. Kyoto: Minerva Shobo.
Yamamoto, T. (1997). Yisuiban dao Liangsuiban Yinger Jiaoshe Xingwei yu Jiaohuanxing Xingwei de Xingcheng: Zhongri Yingyouer Suoyou Xingwei de Jieguo jiqi Fazhan Yanjiu Zhi Yi. [Development of Possessive Behavior and it's Cognitive Structure in Early Childhood; A Cross Cultural Study between Japanese and Chinese Children]. Doctoral Thesis, Beijing Normal University, Beijing, China.
Yamamoto, T. (2000). Murehajimeru Kodomotachi [Developmental process of forming play group in early childhood: Autonomous group and tree-pole structure]. In Okamoto, N. and Asao, T., (Ed.), Nenrei no Shinrigaku [Psychology of Age] (pp. 103–142). Kyoto: Minerva Shobo.
Yamamoto, T. (2006). Chugoku Shisanbanna Taizoku ni Okeru Souki Kyouiku Ishiki [Consciousness of early education in Dai people in Xishuan-Banna, China]. In Ichimi, M., (Ed.), Kaken Houkokusho Higashi Ajia Shokoku ni Okeru Soki kyoiku no Genjo to Kadai ni Kansuru Kokusai Hikaku Kenkyu [International Comparative Studies on Current Situation and Problems of Early Education in East Asian Countries]. Report for Grant in Aid of Ministry of Science and Education, 2002–2004.
Yamamoto, T. and Pian, C. (1996). Guanyu Xiaoxuesheng “Suoyou” Yishi Fazhan de Yanjiu [The development of primary school students' concept of possession]. Xinri Fazhan yi Jiaoyu [Psychological Development and Education], 12, 8–13.
Yamamoto, T. and Pian, C. (2000). Bunka to shite no Okozukai mataha Tadashii Mahotsukai no Sodatekata [Culture as pocket money, or “how to foster ‘true’ wizard].” Nihon Kaseigakkaishi [Journal of Home Economics of Japan], 51, 1169–1174.
Yamamoto, T. and Pian, C. (2001). Okozukai wo Toshite Mita Kodomo no Seikatsu Sekai to Taijin Kankei Kouzou no Minzoku, Chiiki hikaku Kenkyu: Kitsurin-sho Chosenzoku, Kitsurin-sho Kanzoku, Shanghai-shi Kanzoku, Nara-shi Nihonminzoku no Hikaku kara [Comparative study of children's life-world and the structure of human relationships revealed by their pocket money: Data from Korean and Han in Chilin, Han in Shanghai, and Japanese in Nara. In Sogon, S. (Ed.), Bunka Tokuiteki Youiku Kodo to Kodomo no Kanjo Seigyo Kodo no Hattatsu: Sono Nittyu Hikaku [Culture Specific Parenting Style and Development of Children's Emotion Regulation: Comparison between Japan and China]. Report for Grant in Aid of Ministry of Science and Education, 1998– 2001.
Yamamoto, T., Takahashi, T. and Sato, T. (2003). Okane wo Meguru Kodomono “Itsudatsu” to Kinsen Kyoiku [Children's ‘derogation’ and money education]. Nihon Kyouiku Shinri Gakkai Sohkai Happyo Ronbunshu [Paper presented at 45th Congress of Japanese Society of Educational Psychology].
Yamamoto, T., Takahashi, N., Sato, T., Pian, C., Oh, S. and Kim, S. (2003). Okane wo Meguru Kodomo no Seikatsusekai ni Kansuru Hikakubunkateki Kenkyu: Cheju-to Chosa Houkoku [Children's money and their life-world in Jeju Island: A field research from cultural psychological perspectives]. Maebashi Kyoai Gakuen College Ronshu 3:13–28. http://www.kyoai.ac.jp/college/ronshuu/no-03/yamamoto.pdf.
Yamamoto, T. and Zhang, R. (1997). Yisuiban dao Liangsuiban Yingyouer Jiaoshe Xingwei yu Jiaohuanxin Xingwe de Xingcheng [Negotiating and exchanging behaviors concerning possession in early childhood: a study of the structure and it's development of possessional behaviors in Japanese and Chinese children(1)]. Xingri Kexue [Psychological Science] 20:318–323.
Zelizer, V. A. (1989). The social meaning of money: “Special monies.” American Journal of Sociology 95:343–377.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Anandalakshmy, S. (2005). Parenting as a fine art. Keynote address at the Asia-Africa seminar on Parenting through the lifespan: Challenges and opportunities. February 16th–18th 2005. M. S. University of Baroda, Vadodara, India.
Anandalakshmy, S. (1996). The girl child and the family. New Delhi: Department of Women and Child Development, Ministry of Human Resource Development, Govt. of India.
Anandalakshmy, S. & Bajaj, M. (1981). Childhood in the weavers community of Varanasi. In D. Sinha (Ed.), Socialization of the Indian child. New Delhi: Concept.
Azad, N. (2003). Gender and family: State intervention in India. In M. Pernau, I. Ahmed & H. Reifeld (Eds.), Family and gender: Changing values in Germany and India (pp. 198–223). New Delhi: Sage.
Badrinath, C. (2003). The householder, grhastha in the Mahabharata. In M. Pernau, I. Ahmad, & H. Reifeld (Eds.), Family and gender: Changing values in Germany and India (pp. 113–139). New Delhi: Sage.
Banerjee, N. (2003). The marginal families. In M. Pernau, I. Ahmad, & H. Reifeld (Eds.), Family and gender: Changing values in Germany and India (pp. 278–295). New Delhi: Sage.
Bergstrom, T. C. (1997). A survey of theories of the family: In M. Rosenzweig & O. Stark (Eds.), Handbook of population and family economics (pp. 21–79). New York: Harper Collins.
Burman, E. (1994). Deconstructing developmental psychology. London: Routledge.
Chandra, N. (1996). Constructing a national popular: The Hindu India in Amar Chitra Katha (1970–91). Unpublished M. Phil. Dissertation, Jawaharlal Nehru University, New Delhi.
Chaudhary, N. (2005). Researching communities: Travails of working with Indian communities. Cross-cultural Psychology Bulletin, 43(4), 5–13.
Chaudhary, N. & Sharma, N. (2005). From home to school. Seminar, 546, 14–20.
Chaudhary, N. (2004). Listening to culture. New Delhi: Sage.
Chowdhury, P. (1994). The veiled women: Shifting gender equations in rural Haryana. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
Chauhan, A. Driven to despair. Times of India, March 14th. 2005. http://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/articleshow/1050309.cms. accessed on April 10th 2005.
Davis-Friedmann, D. (1983). Long lives. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Dube, S. (1998). Land of poverty: Memoirs of an Indian family 1947–1977. London: Zed Books.
Dumont, L. (1980). Homo Hierarchicus: The caste system and its implications. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Durkheim, E. (1897/1997). Suicide. Columbus: The Free Press.
Eshleman, R. J. (1991). The family: An introduction (Sixth edition). Boston: Ally & Bacon.
Foster, M. E. (2002). How economists think about family resources and child development. Child Development, 73(6), 1904–1914.
Gandhi, R. (2005). Muniya's light: A narrative of truth and myth. New Delhi: Roli Books and IndiaInk.
Gittins, D. (1985). The family in question. London: MacMillan.
Goode, W. J. (1963). World revolution and family patterns. London: The Free Press of Glencoe.
Guha, R. (2005). The colours of India. The Hindu Sunday Magazine, April 10, 2005.
Jain, A. (2005). Is Arranged Marriage Really Any Worse Than Craigslist? http://www.aldaily.com. Accessed on April 11th 2005.
Jenks, C. (1996). Suffer little children: A sociological analysis of changing attitudes to child abuse in the late twentieth century. In G. Pfeffer and D. K. Behera (Eds.), Contemporary Society: Childhood and Complex Order (pp. 182–213). New Delhi: Manak Publications.
Kapoor, S. (2005). Alternate care for infants of employed mothers. Unpublished doctoral dissertation, Department of Child Development, Lady Irwin College, University of Delhi.
Karlekar, M. (2003). Domestic violence. In V. Das (Ed.), The Oxford India companion to sociology and social anthropology (pp. 1127–1157). New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
Kumar, K. (1993). Study of childhood & family. In T. S. Saraswathi & B. Kaur (Eds.), Human development and family studies in India: An agenda for research and policy (pp. 67–76). New Delhi: Sage.
Kurtz, S. N. (1992). All the mothers are one: Hindu India and the cultural reshaping of psychoanalysis. New York: Columbia University Press.
Lawrence, J. A. & Valsiner, J. (1993). Social determinacy of human development: An analysis of the conceptual roots of the internalisation process. Human Development, 36, 150–167.
McGoldrick, M. (1998). Re-visioning family therapy: Race, culture, and gender in clinical practice. New York: Guilford.
Menon, U. (2003). Morality and context: A study of Hindu understandings. In J. Valsiner & K. Connolly (Eds.), Handbook of human development, (pp. 431–449). London: Sage.
Mintz, S. (2005). Huck's raft: A history of American childhood. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Ogburn, W. F. (1938). The family and its functions. In W. F. Ogburn (Ed.), Recent social trends. Chapter 13. New York: McGraw Hill.
Olson, D. H. & DeFrain, J. (1994). Marriage and the family: Diversity and strengths. Mountain View, Ca.: Mayfield Publishing Company.
Parsons, T. & Bales, R. F. (1955). Family, socialisation and interaction process. Glencoe, IL: The Free Press.
Pernau, M. (2003). Introduction. In M. Pernau, I. Ahmad, & H. Reifeld (Eds.), Family and gender: Changing values in Germany and India (pp. 9–34). New Delhi: Sage.
Rajagopalachari, C. (1999, 36th Edition). Mahabharata. Bombay: Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan. First Edition: 1951.
Ramanujan, A. K. (1994/1991). Folk tales from India. New Delhi: Penguin.
Raman, V. (2003). The diverse life-worlds of Indian childhood. In M. Pernau, I. Ahmad, & H. Reifeld (Eds.), Family and gender: Changing values in Germany and India (pp. 84–111). New Delhi: Sage.
Reifeld, H. (2003). State interest in the family: Social change and social policy in Germany. In M. Pernau, I. Ahmad, & H. Reifeld, (Eds.), Family and gender: Changing values in Germany and India (pp. 224–241). New Delhi: Sage.
Saraswathi, T. S. (1999). Adult-child continuity in India: Is adolescence a myth or an emerging reality? In T. S. Saraswathi (Ed.), Culture, socialization and human development: Theory, research and applications in India. New Delhi: Sage.
Schneider, D. M. (1968). 1980/1968. American kinship: A cultural account. 2nd edition. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Sen, A. (2005). The argumentative Indian: Writings on Indian history, culture and identity. London: Penguin.
Sherif, M. (1936). Psychology of social norms. New York: Harper & Brothers.
Simmel, G. (1904). The sociology of conflict. American Journal of Sociology, 9, 490–671.
Singer, M. (1968). The Indian joint family in modern industry. In M. Singer & B. Cohen (Eds.), Structure and change in Indian society (pp. 423–452). New York: Wenner-Gren Foundation.
Stratton, P. (2003). Contemporary families as contexts for development. In J. Valsiner & K. Connolly (Eds.), Handbook of human development (pp. 333–357). London: Sage.
The World Bank. Snakes and ladders: Factors influencing successful primary school completion for children in poverty contexts. Discussion paper series, report no. 6, South Asia Human Development Sector, New Delhi: The World Bank, 2004.
Trautmann, T. R. (2003). Patterns of marriage. In V. Das (Ed.), The Oxford India companion to sociology and social anthropology (pp. 1105–1126). New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
Trawick, M. (1990). Notes on love in a Tamil family. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Trawick, M. (2003). The person behind the family. In V. Das (Ed.), The Oxford companion to Sociology and Social Anthropology. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
Uberoi, P. (2003). The family in India: Beyond the nuclear versus joint debate. In V. Das (Ed.), The Oxford India companion to sociology and social anthropology (pp. 1062–1103). New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
Valsiner, J. & Litvinovic, G. (1996). Processes of generalisation in parental reasoning. In S. Harkness & C. M. Super (Eds.), Parents' cultural belief systems: Their origins, expressions and consequences (pp. 56–82). New York: The Guilford Press.
Vatuk, S. (1990). To be a burden on others: Dependency anxiety among elders in India. In O. M. Lynch (Ed.), Divine passions: The social construction of emotions in India. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Verma, S. & Sharma, D. (2003). Cultural continuity amid social change: Adolescents' use of free time in India. In S. Verma & R. Larson (Eds.), Examining adolescent leisure time across cultures (pp. 37–51). San Francisco: Jossey-Boss.
Verma, S. & Saraswathi, T. S. (2002). Adolescence in India: Street children or Silicon Valley millionaires. In B. B. Brown, R. W. Larson, & T. S. Saraswathi (Eds.), The world's youth: Adolescence in eight regions of the globe (pp. 105–140). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Vindhya, U. (2003). Private crimes and public sanction: Violence against women in the family. In M. Pernau, I. Ahmad, & H. Reifeld (Eds.), Family and gender: Changing values in Germany and India (pp. 322–348). New Delhi: Sage.
Whitaker (1979). is cited in Olson and DeFrain as mentioned in the text.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Bartlett, F. (1923). Psychology and Primitive Culture. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Bartlett, F. (1932). Remembering: A Study in Experimental and Social Psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Duveen, G. (1998). The psychosocial production of knowledge: Social representations and psychologic. Culture and Psychology, 4, 455–472.
Duveen, G. (2000). The Power of Ideas. Introduction to S. Moscovici (Ed. G. Duveen) Social Representations: Explorations in Social Psychology (pp. 1–17). Cambridge: Polity Press.
Duveen, G. (2001). Representations, identities, resistance. In K. Deaux and G. Philogène (Eds.), Representations of the Social (pp. 257–270). Oxford: Blackwell.
Duveen, G. and Lloyd, B. (1990). Introduction. In G. Duveen and B. Lloyd (Eds.), Social Representations and the Development of Knowledge (pp. 1–10). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Philogène, G. (2001). From race to culture: The emergence of African American. In K. Deaux and G. Philogène (Eds.), The Representation of the Social: Bridging Theoretical Perspectives, New York: Basil Blackwell.
Goldmann, L. (1976). Cultural creation in modem society. Saint Louis: Telos Press.
Jahoda, G. (1988). Critical notes and reflections on “social representations.” European Journal of Social Psychology, 18, 195–209.
Jodelet, D. (1991). Madness and Social Representations. London: Harvester.
Jodelet, D. (2002). Les representations socials dans le champ de la culture, Social Science Information, 41, 111–133.
Jovchelovitch, S. and Gervais, M.-C. (1999). Social representations of health and illness: The case of the Chinese community in England. Journal of Community and Applied Social Psychology, 9, 247–260.
Lave, J. (1988). Cognition in practice. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Lloyd, B. and Duveen, G. (1990). A Semiotic Analysis of the Development of Social Representations of Gender. In G. Duveen and B. Lloyd (Eds.), Social Representations and the Development of Knowledge (pp. 27–46). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Marková, I. (2003). Dialogicality and Social Representations: The Dynamics of Mind. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Moscovici, S. (1973). Foreword. In C. Herzlich Health and Illness. London: Academic Press.
Moscovici, S. (1976). La Psychanalyse, son image et son public. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
Moscovici, S. (1981). On Social Representation. In J. Forgas (Ed.), Social Cognition. London: Academic Press.
Moscovici, S. (1984). The Phenomenon of Social Representations. In Farr, R. and Moscovici, S. (1984) (Eds). Social Representations. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Reprinted in Moscovici, 2000)
Moscovici, S. (1988). Notes towards a definition of social representations. European Journal of Social Psychology, 18, 211–250.
Moscovici, S. (1990). Social psychology and developmental psychology: Extending the conversation. In G. Duveen and B. Lloyd (Eds.), Social Representations and the Development of Knowledge. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Moscovici, S. (2000). Social Representations: Explorations in Social Psychology. (Edited by G. Duveen). Cambridge: Polity Press.
Parsons, A. (1969). Belief, Magic and Anomie: Essays in Psychological Anthropology. New York: The Free Press.
Piaget, J. and Inhelder, B. (1971). The Mental Imagery of the Child. New York: Basic Books.
Preda, A. (2005). AIDS, Rhetoric and Medical Knowledge. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Psaltis, C. and Duveen, G. (2006). Social relations and cognitive development: The influence of conversation type and representations of gender. European Journal of Social Psychology, 36, 407–430.
Rogoff, B. (1990). Apprenticeship in thinking. New York: Oxford University Press.
Saito, A. (1996). ‘Bartlett's Way’ and social representations: The case of Zen transmitted across cultures. The Japanese Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 35, 263–277.
Schütz, A. (1972). The Phenomenology of the Social World. London: Heinemann.
Valsiner, J. (2003). Beyond social representations: A theory of enablement. Papers on social Representations (www.psr.juk.at), 12, 7.1–7.16.
Valsiner, J. and Van de Veer, R. (2000). The social mind: Construction of the idea. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Wagner, W., Duveen, G., Themel, M., and Verma, J. (1999). The modernisation of tradition: Thinking about madness in Patna, India. Culture and Psychology, 5, 413–445.
Wagner, W., Duveen, G., Verma, J., and Themel, M. (2000). ‘I have some faith and at the same time I don't believe’ – Cognitive Polyphasia and Cultural Change in India. Journal of Community and Applied Psychology, 10, 301–314.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Aronfreed, J. (1968). Conduct and conscience. New York: Academic Press.
Asch, S. (1952). Social psychology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Baldwin, J. M. (1911). Thought and things: A study of the development of thought or genetic logic. Vol. 3. Interest and art. London: George Allen.
Bandura, A. (1991). Social cognitive theory of moral thought and action. In Kurtines W. M. & Gewirtz J. L. (Eds.) (1991). Handbook of moral behavior and development. Vol. 1 (pp. 45–103). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Bandura, A. (1999). Moral disengagement in the perpetration of inhumanities. Personality and Social Psychology Review (Special issue on evil and violence), 3, 193–209.
Bandura, A. (2004). The role of selective moral disengagement in terrorism and counterterrorism. In Mogaddham F. M. & Marsella A. J. (Eds.), Understanding terrorism (pp. 121–150). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Baumann, Z. (2000). Liquid modernity. Cambridge: Polity Press.
Benson, C. (2001). The cultural psychology of self. Place, morality and the art in human worlds. London: Routledge.
Berger, P. L. (1997). Redeeming laughter. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.
Berger, P. L. & Luckmann, T. (1966). The social construction of reality. New York: Doubleday.
Berlin, I. (1969). Four essays on liberty. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Bhatia, S. (2000). Language socialisation and the construction of socio-moral meanings. Journal of Moral Education, 29, 149–166.
Billig, M. (1988). Arguing and thinking. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Blasi, A. (1980). Bridging moral cognition and moral action. Psychological Bulletin, 88, 1–45.
Blasi, A. (1988). Identity and the development of the self. In Lapsley D. K. & Power F. C. (Eds.), Self, ego, and identity (pp. 226–242). New York: Springer Verlag.
Blum, L. A. (1980). Friendship, altruism and morality. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
Bodei, R. (2002). Destini personali [Personal destinies]. Milano: Feltrinelli.
Boesch, E. E. (2003). Why does Sally never call Bobby ‘I’? Culture & Psychology, 9, 287–297.
Bruner, J. (1990). Acts of mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Colby, A. & Damon, W. (1992). Some do care: Contemporary lives of moral commitment. New York: The Free Press.
de Rivera, J. & Sarbin, T. R. (1998). Believed-in imaginings. The narrative construction of reality. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Dewey, J. (1980). Art as experience, New York: Putnam. [Orig. pub. 1934]
Durkheim, E. (1973). Moral education: A study in the theory and application of the sociology of education. New York: Free Press. [Orig. pub. 1925]
Epstein, S. (1973). The self concept revisited or a theory of a theory. American Psychologist, 28, 405–416.
Fogel, A., Lyra, M. C., & Valsiner, J. (Eds.) (1997). Dynamics and indeterminism in developmental and social processes. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Frankena, W. K. (1973). Ethics. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Fromm, E. (1973). The anatomy of human destructiveness. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
Geertz, C. (1973). Interpretation of cultures. New York: Basic Books.
Gerth, A. H. & Wright Mills, C. (1953). Character and social structure. New York: Harcourt/Brace.
Gilligan, C. (1982). In a different voice. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Habermas, F. (1990). Justice and solidarity. In Wren T. (Ed.), The moral domain (pp. 224–251). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Harré, R. (1983). Personal being. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Heelas, P. (1981). Introduction to Heelas P. & Lock A., Indigenous psychologies. The anthropology of the self. London: Academic Press.
Hoffman, M. L. (1991). Empathy, social cognition, and moral action. In Kurtines W. M. & Gewirtz J. L. (Eds.), Handbook of moral behavior and development. Vol. 1 (pp. 275–301). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Horowitz, I. L. (1980). Moral development, authoritarian distemper, and democratic persuasion. In Wilson R. W. & Schochet G. J. (Eds.), Moral development and politics (5–21). New York: Praeger
Kegan, R. (1982). The evolving self. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Kohlberg, L. (1971). From is to ought: How to commit the naturalistic fallacy and get away with it in the study of moral development. In Mischel T. (Ed.), Cognitive development and epistemology (pp. 151–235). New York: Academic Press.
Kohlberg, L., Levine, C., & Hewer, A. (1983). Moral stages: A current formulation and a response to critics. Basel: Karger.
Kurtines, W. M. & Gewirtz, J. L. (Eds.) (1991). Handbook of moral behavior and development. Vols. 3. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Lakoff, G. & Johnson, M. (1980). Metaphors we live by. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Lasch, C. (1979). The culture of narcissism. New York: Norton.
Lawrence, J. A. & Valsiner, I. (1993). Conceptual roots of internalisation: from transmission to transformation. Human Development, 36, 150–167.
LeVine R. A. (1984). Properties of culture. An ethnographic view. In Shweder, R. A. & LeVine, R. A. (Eds.). Culture theory. Essays on mind, self, and emotion (pp. 67–87). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
McAdams, D. P., Josselson, R., & Lieblich, A. (Eds.) (2001). Turns in the road. Narrative studies of lives in transition. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Meyerson, I. (1948). Les fonctions psychologiques et les oeuvres [Psychological functions and products]. Paris: Vrin.
Milgram, S. (1974). Obedience to authority, an experimental view. London: Tavistock.
Mitscherlich, A. (1963). Auf dem Weg zu Vaterlosen Gesellschaft [Towards a fatherless society]. München: Piper & Co. Verlag.
Modgill, S. & Modgill, C. (Eds.) (1985). Lawrence Kohlberg. Consensus and controversy. Philadelphia, PA: Falmer Press.
Mogaddham, F. M. & Marsella, A. J. (Eds.) (2004). Understanding terrorism. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Nagel, T. (1979). Mortal questions. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Narayan, U. (1988). Working together across difference: some considerations on emotions and political practice. Hypatia, 3(23), 31–47.
Noam, G. (1993). “Normative vulnerabilities” of self and their transformation in moral action. In Noam G. & Wren Th. (Eds.), The moral self (pp. 209–238). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Noam, G. & Wren, T. (Eds.) (1993). The moral self. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press
Oliner, S. P. & Oliner, P. M. (1988). The altruistic personality. Rescuers of Jewish in nazi Europe. New York: The Free Press.
Oliveira, Z. M. R. & Valsiner, J. (1997). Play and imagination: the psychological construction of novelty. In Fogel A., Lyra M. C. & Valsiner J. (Eds.), Dynamics and indeterminism in developmental and social processes (pp. 119–133). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Paolicchi, P. (1987). Homo ethicus. Pisa: Ets.
Paolicchi, P. (1994). Psicologia della colpa tra pubblico e privato [The psychology of guilt between public and private]. In Castelfranchi C., D'Amico R. & Poggi I. (Eds.), Sensi di colpa [Senses of guilt] (pp. 274–294). Firenze: Giunti (Ed.).
Paolicchi, P. (1995). Narratives of volunteering. Journal of Moral Education, 2, 159–173.
Paolicchi, P. (2000). The use of stories in intercultural education. In Leicester M., Modgil S. & Modgil C. (Eds.), Education, culture and values. Vol III, Classroom issues (pp. 145–155). London: Falmer Press
Pepper, S. (1942). World hypothesis. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Piaget, J. (1970). Tendences principales de la recherche dans les sciences sociales et humaines, Part. I: Sciences sociales. Paris-La Haye: Mouton.
Plato. (1992). Protagoras. (Trans. S. Lombardo and K. Bell). Indianapolis: Hackett.
Rest, J. R. (1983). Morality. In Flavell, J. H., & Markman, E. (Eds.), Handbook of child psychology (4th Ed.), vol. 3: Cognitive development (pp. 556–629). New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Ricoeur, P. (1990). Etica e conflitto dei doveri: il tragico dell'azione [Ethics and conflict of duties: the tragic of action]. Il Mulino, XXXIX, n. 3., 365–390.
Shweder, R. A. (1984). Anthropology's romantic rebellion against the Enlightment, or there's more to thinking than reason and evidence. In Shweder, R. A. & Le Vine, R. A. (Eds.), Culture theory. Essays on mind, self and emotion (pp. 27–66). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Shweder, R. A. 1990. Cultural psychology – what is it? In Stigler, J. W., Shweder, R. A., & Herdt, G. (Eds.), Cultural psychology (pp. 1–43). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Shweder, R. A. (2003). Why do men barbecue? Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Shweder, R. A. & Bourne, E. G. (1984). Does the concept of the person vary cross-culturally? In Shweder R. A. & LeVine R. A. (Eds.), Culture theory. Essays on mind, self and emotion (pp. 158–199). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Shweder, R. A., Mahapatra, M., & Miller, J. C. (1987). Culture and moral development. In Kagan, J. & Lamb, S. (Eds.), The emergence of morality in young children (pp. 1–83). Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Shweder, R. A. & Much, N. C. (1987). Determinations of meaning: Discourse and moral socialization. In Kurtines W. M. & Gewirtz J. L. (Eds.), Social interaction and socio-moral development (pp. 197–244). New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Shweder, R. A., Much, N. C., Mahapatra, M., & Park, L. (1997). The “big three” of morality (autonomy, community, and divinity) and the “big three” explanations of suffering. In Brandt A. & Rozin P. (Eds.), Morality and health (pp. 119–169). London: Routledge.
Smith, R. (1997). The Norton history of the human sciences. New York: Norton.
Sperry, R. (1983). Science and moral priority. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
Staub, E. (1993). Individual and group selves: Motivation, morality, and evolution. In Noam G. & Wren Th. (Eds.), The moral self (pp. 337–358). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Staub, E. (2004). Understanding and responding to group violence: Genocide, mass killing, and terrorism. In Mogaddham F. M. & Marsella A. J. (Eds.), Understanding terrorism (pp. 151–168). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Turiel, E. (2002). The culture of morality. Social development, context, and conflict. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Valsiner, J. (2000). Culture and human development. London: Sage.
Vandenberg, B. (1993). Developmental psychology, God and the Good, Theory & Psychology, 3(2), 191–205.
Vernant, J.-P. (1982). Religions, histoire, raisons. Maspero, Paris.
Wertsch, J. V. (1991). Voices of the mind. London: Harvester Wheatsheaf.
Whiting, B. B. & Whiting, J. W. M. (1975). Children of six cultures. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Wittgenstein, L. (1953). Philosophical investigations. Oxford: Blackwell.
Wren, T. (Ed.), (1990). The moral domain. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Allport, G. W. (1955). Becoming: Basic consideration for a psychology of personality. New Haven: Yale University Press.
Aslam, D. (2005). Victory: Schoolgirl describes her fight to wear Islamic dress. The Guardian, March 3, 1–2.
Bekoff, M. (2002). Virtuous nature. New Scientist, 175, 34.
Billig, M. (1991). Ideology and opinions. London: Sage.
Brosnan, S. F., & de Waal, F. B. M. (2003). Monkeys reject unequal pay. Nature, 425, 297–299.
Bruner, J. (1990). Acts of meaning. Cambridge, MA. : Harvard University Press.
Crossley, M. L. (2000). Introducing narrative psychology. Buckingham, UK: Open University Press.
Dershowitz, A. (2004). Rights from wrongs: A secular theory of the origins of rights. New York: Basic Books.
Doise, W. (2002). Human rights as social representations. London: Routledge.
Ellemers, N., Spears, R., & Doosje, B. (Eds.), (1999). Social identity: Context, commitment, content. Oxford: Blackwell.
Finkel, N., & Moghaddam, F. M. (Eds.), (2004). The psychology of rights and duties: Empirical contributions and normative commentaries. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association Press.
Fox, D., & Prilleltensky, I. (Eds.), (1997). Critical psychology. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Goffman, E. (1956). The presentation of the self in everyday life. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin.
Goffman, E. (1974). Frame analysis: An essay on the organization of experience. New York: Harper and Row.
Harré, R. (2002). Cognitive science. London: Sage.
Harré, R., & Moghaddam, F. M. (Eds.), (2004). The self and others: Positioning individuals and groups in personal, political, and cultural contexts. Westport, CT: Praeger.
Kinzer, S. (2003). All the Shah's men: An American coup and the roots of Middle East terror. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley and Sons.
Louis, W. R., & Taylor, D. M. (2004). Rights and duties as group norms: Implications of intergroup research for the study of rights and responsibilities. In N. Finkel & F. M. Moghaddam. (Eds.), The psychology of rights and duties: Empirical contributions and normative commentaties (pp. 105–134). Washington, DC. : American Psychological Association Press.
Miller, N., Pederson, W. C., Earlywine, M., & Pollock, V. E. (2003). A theoretical model of triggered displaced aggression. Personality and Social Psychology Review, 7, 75–97.
Moghaddam, F. M. (2000). Toward a cultural theory of human rights. Theory & Psychology, 10, 291–312.
Moghaddam, F. M. (2002). The individual and society: A cultural integration. New York: Worth.
Moghaddam, F. M. (2004). The cycle of rights and duties in intergroup relations. New Review of Social Psychology, 3, 125–130.
Moghaddam, F. M. (2005). Great ideas in psychology: A cultural and historical introduction. Oxford: Oneworld.
Moghaddam, F. M., & Harré, R. (1995). But is it science? Traditional and normative approaches to the study of social behavior. American behavioral Scientist, 36, 22–38.
Moghaddam, F. M., & Riley, C. J. (2004). Toward a cultural theory of human rights and duties in human development. In N. Finkel & F. M. Moghaddam (Eds.), The psychology of rights and duties: Empirical contributions and normative commentaries. (pp. 75–104). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association Press.
Moghaddam, F. M., Slocum, N., Finkel, N., More, Z., & Harré, R. (2000). Toward a cultural theory of duties. Culture & Psychology, 6, 275–302.
Moscovici, S., Mucchi-Paina, A., & Maas, A. (Eds.), (1994). Minority influence. Chicago: Nelson-Hall.
Pollack, K. (2004). The Persian puzzle: The conflict between Iran and America. New York: Random House.
Tan, S. L., & Moghaddam, F. M. (1999). Intergroup positioning. In R. Harré & L.
Van Langenhove (Eds.), Positioning theory (pp. 178–194). Oxford: Blackwell.
Tajfel, H., & Turner, J. C. (1986). The social identity theory of intergroup behavior. In S. Worchel & G. Austin (Eds.), Psychology of intergroup relations (pp. 7-24). Chicago: Nelson-Hall.
Valsiner, J. (2000). Culture and human development. London: Sage.
Valsiner, J. (2004). Three years later: Culture in psychology – Between social positioning and producing new knowledge. Culture & Psychology, 10, 5–27.
Van Der Veer, R., & Valsiner, J. (1991). Understanding Vygotsky: A quest for synthesis. Oxford: Blackwell.
Weinreich, P., & Saunderson, W. (Eds.), (2003). Analysing identity: Cross-cultural, societal and clinical contexts. London: Routledge.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Agamben, Giorgio, 1998. Homo Sacer. Sovereign Power and Bare Life. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
Anderson, Benedict, 1983/1991. Imagined Communities. London: Verso.
Appadurai, Arjun, 1996. Modernity at Large: Cultural Dimensions of Globalization. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
Ascherson, Neil, 2004. From multiculturalism to where? London: openDemocracy (www.openDemocracy.net), August 19.
Bauböck, Rainer, (Ed.), 1994. From Aliens to Citizens. Redefining the Status of Immigrants in Europe. Aldershot: Avebury.
Benhabib, Seyla, 2000. The Claims of Culture. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Berger, Peter, (Ed.), 1998. The Limits of Social Cohesion: Conflict and Mediation in Pluralist Societies. Boulder: Westview.
Bhabha, Homi, (Ed.), 1990. Nation and Narration. London: Routledge.
Billig, Michael, 1995. Banal Nationalism. London: Sage.
Bjola, Corneliu, 2000. The Impact of “Symbolic Politics” on Foreign Policy during the Democratization Process. Paper presented at the Kokkalis Graduate Student Workshop on Southeastern and East-Central Europe, John F. Kennedy School of Government, Harvard University, February 12.
Boswell, David & Jessica Evans, (Eds.), 1999. Representing the Nation: A Reader. London and New York: Routledge.
Campbell, David, 1992. Writing Security: United States Foreign Policy and the Politics of Identity. Manchester: Manchester University Press.
Cannadine, David, (Ed.), 1990. The Speeches of Winston Churchill. Harmondsworth: Penguin.
Chrétien, Jean, 1996. Symbolic Politics. Speech held at Windsor, Ontario, April 28. Downloaded from www.pco-bcp.gc.ca/aia/default.asp?Language=E&Page=PressRoom&Sub=Speeches&doc=19960428/e.htm&PrinterFriendly=y).
Christiansen, Flemming & Ulf Hedetoft, (Eds.), 2004. The Politics of Multiple Belonging. Aldershot: Ashgate.
Croucher, Sheila, 1994. Globalization and Belonging. Lanham and Boulder: Rowman & Littlefield.
Danish Parliament 2002. Debate on Bill for the Conferment of Citizenship – Bill no. L 151 (Forslag til lov om indfødsrets meddelelse), April 2. Downloaded at www.folketinget.dk/samling/20012/salen/L151/BEH1_45_1(NB).htm.
Delanty, Gerard, 2002. Communitarianism and Citizenship, in Engin F. Isin & Brian Turner, eds, Handbook of Citizenship Studies. London: Sage.
Eco, Umberto, 1976. A Theory of Semiotics. Bloomington: Indiana State University Press.
Edelman, Murray, 1985. The Symbolic Uses of Politics. Second and revised edition. Urbana: The University of Illinois Press.
Frykman, Maja Povrzanovic, (Ed.), 2004. Transnational Spaces: Disciplinary Perspectives. Malmö: IMER/Malmö University.
Gellner, Ernest, 1983. Nations and Nationalism. Oxford: Blackwell.
Goodhart, David, 2004. Discomfort of Strangers. The Guardian, February 24.
Guiraudon, Virginie & Christian Joppke, (Eds.), 2001. Controlling a New Migration World. London: Routledge.
Hall, John, (Ed.), 1998. The State of the Nation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Hannerz, Ulf, 1992. Cultural Complexity. New York: Columbia University Press.
Hannerz, Ulf, 1996. Transnational Connections. London: Routledge.
Hedetoft, Ulf, 1990. War and Death as Touchstones of National Identity. Aalborg: The European Research Programme, Aalborg University.
Hedetoft, Ulf, 1995. Signs of Nations. Aldershot: Dartmouth.
Hedetoft, Ulf, 1997. The Cultural Semiotics of “European Identity,” in Alice Landau & Richard Whitman, eds, Rethinking the European Union. Houndmills: Macmillan.
Hedetoft, Ulf, (Ed.), 1998. Political Symbols, Symbolic Politics. European Identities in Transformation. Aldershot: Ashgate.
Hedetoft, Ulf & Mette Hjort, (Eds.), 2002. The Postnational Self: Belonging and Identity. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
Herzfeld, Michael, 1992. The Social Production of Indifference. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press.
Hobsbawm, Eric, 1990. Nations and Nationalism since 1780. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Hobsbawm, Eric & Terence Ranger, (Eds.), 1983. The Invention of Tradition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Hroch, Miroslav, 1985. Social Preconditions of National Revival in Europe. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Kalm, Sara, 2005. Migration Control Policies as Spatial Organization – Mobility, Power, and Geopolitical Imaginations. AMID Working Paper no. 35. Aalborg: Academy for Migration Studies in Denmark.
Kapferer, Bruce, 1988. Legends of People, Myths of State. Washington DC: Smithsonian Institution Press.
Kastoryano, Riva, 2001. Negotiating Identities. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Kertzer, David I., 1988. Ritual, Politics and Power. New Haven and London: Yale University Press.
Kymlicka, Will, 1995. Multicultural Citizenship: A Liberal Theory of Minority Rights. Oxford: Clarendon.
Kymlicka, Will, 2001. Politics in the Vernacular: Nationalism, Multiculturalism and Citizenship. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Massey, Doreen, 1994. Space, Place and Gender. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
Mayall, James, 1990. Nationalism and International Society. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Medrano, Diez, 2003. Framing Europe. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Mosse, George, E., 1975. The Nationalization of the Masses. New York: H. Fertig.
Mosse, George, E., 1990. Fallen Soldiers. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Nagel, Klaus-Jürgen, 2004. Transcending the National, Asserting the National: How Stateless Nations like Scotland, Wales and Catalonia React to European Integration. Australian Journal of Politics and History, 50, 1: 57–74.
Nora, Pierre et al., 1984–91. Les Lieux de Mémoire. Paris: Gallimard.
Nussbaum, Martha, 1996. For Love of Country: Debating the Limits of Patriotism. Boston: Beacon Press.
O'Leary, Brendan et al., 2001. Right-sizing the State. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Parekh, Bhiku, 2000. Rethinking Multiculturalism. Houndmills: Macmillan.
Pieke, Frank, Pál Nyíri, Mette Thunø, & Antonella Caccagno, 2004. Transnational Chinese. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
Renan, Joseph Ernest, 1882/1990. What is a nation? [original title “Qu'est-ce qu'une nation?”], in Homi Bhabha, (Ed.), Nation and Narration. London: Routledge.
Robertson, Roland, 1992. Social Theory and Global Culture. London: Sage.
Schlesinger, Philip, 1992. Europeanness: A New Cultural Battlefield. Innovation, 5, 1: 11–23.
Schmitt, Carl, 1934/1996. The Concept of the Political, transl. George Schwab. Chicago: Chicago University Press.
Sears, David O., 1993. Symbolic Politics: A Socio-Psychological Theory, in Shanto Iyengar & Wm J. McGuire, (Eds.), Explorations in Political Psychology. Durham: Durham University Press.
Shore, Cris, 1993. Inventing the “People's Europe”: critical approaches to European community cultural policy. Man 28, 4: 779–800.
Shore, Cris & Annabel Black, 1994. Citizens' Europe and the Construction of European Identity, in Victoria A. Goddard, Josep R. Llobera & Cris Shore, (Eds.), The Anthropology of Europe. Oxford: Berg.
Smith, Anthony D., 1986. The Ethnic Origins of Nations. Oxford: Blackwell.
Smith, Michael P. & Luis E. Guarnizo, (Eds.), 1998. Transnationalism From Below. New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Publishers.
Soysal, Yasemin, 1994. Limits of Citizenship. Migrants and Postnational Membership in Europe. Chicago: Chicago University Press.
Stolcke, Verena, 1995. Talking Culture. New Boundaries, New Rhetorics of Exclusion in Europe. Current Anthropology 16, 1 (February): 1–24.
Taras, Ray, 2002. Liberal and Illiberal Nationalisms. London: Palgrave.
Taylor, Charles, 1994. The Politics of Recognition, in Amy Gutmann, (Ed.), Multiculturalism. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Toggenburg, Gabriel N., 2004. Minority Protection and the Enlarged European Union. Budapest: Open Society Institute.
Voigt, Rüdiger, (Ed.), 1989. Symbole der Politik. Politik der Symbole. Opladen: Leske + Budrich.
Weber, Eugen, 1976. Peasants into Frenchmen. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
Weber, Max, 1948/1994. The Nation, in H. H. Gerth & C. Wright Mills, (Eds.), From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
White House, 2002. National Security Strategy of the United States. Washington, DC: The White House.
Wodak, Ruth & Teun van Dijk, (Eds.), 2000. Racism at the Top. Klagenfurt: Drava.
Wæver, Ole, 1993. Societal Security: the Concept, in Ole Wæver et al., Identity, Migration and the New Security Agenda in Europe. London: Pinter.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Bakhtin, M. M. (1981). The dialogic imagination: Four essays by M. M. Bakhtin (C. Emerson & M. Holquist, Trans.). Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.
Bakhtin, M. M. (1984). Problems of Dostoevsky's poetics (C. Emerson, Trans.). Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press. (Originally published in 1929, revised in 1963).
Bakhtin, M. M. (1986). Speech genres and other late essays. Austin: University of Texas Press. (Originally published in 1979).
Bateson, G. (2000). Steps to an ecology of mind.Chicago: Chicago University Press. (original work published in 1972).
Billig, M. (1997). The dialogical unconscious: Psychoanalysis, discursive psychology and the nature of repression. European Journal of Social Psychology, 36, 139–159.
Bråten, S. (1998). Infant learning by altero-centric-participation: The reverse of egocentric observation in autism. In S. Bråten (Ed.), Intersubjective communication and emotion in early ontogeny (pp. 105–124). Cambridge, U.K.: Cambridge University Press.
Bråten, S. (2003). Participant perception of others' acts: Virtual otherness in infants and adults. Culture & Psychology, 9, 261–276.
Buber, M. (1962). I and Thou (R. G. Smith, Transl.). Edinburgh: T&T Clark. (original work published in 1923).
Fogel, A., Koyer, I., Bellagamba, F., & Bell, H. (2002). The dialogical self in the first two years of life. Theory & Psychology, 12, 191–205.
Frankl, V. (1984). Men's search for meaning. New York: Simon & Schuster. (original work published in 1946).
Greenberg, L. S., Rice, L. N., & Elliott, R. (1993). Facilitating emotional change: The moment-by-moment process. New York: Guilford Press.
Hermans, H. J. M. (1996). Voicing the self: From information processing to dialogical interchange. Psychological Bulletin, 119, 31–50.
Hermans, H. J. M. (2002). The dialogical self as society of mind: Introduction. Theory & Psychology, 12, 147–160.
Hermans, H. J. M. (2004). The dialogical self: Between exchange and power. In H. J. M. Hermans & G. Dimaggio, (Eds.), The dialogical self in psychotherapy (pp. 13–28). Hove, East Sussex: Brunner-Routledge.
Hermans, H. J. M., & Gonçalves, M. (1999). Self-knowledge and self-complexity: A dialogical view. Constructivism and the Human Sciences, 4, 178–197.
Hermans, H. J. M., & Kempen, H. (1993). The dialogical self: Meaning as movement. San Diego, CA: Academic Press.
Hermans, H. J. M., Kempen, H., & Van Loon, R. (1992). The dialogical self: Beyond individualism and rationalism. American Psychologist, 47, 23–33.
Holquist, M. (1990). Dialogism: Bakhtin and his world. New York: Routledge.
Jacques, F. (1991). Difference and subjectivity: Dialogue and personal identity (A. Rothwell, Trans.) New Haven, CT: Yale University Press. (Original work published in 1982).
James, W. (1890). The principles of psychology (Vol. 1). London: MacMillan.
Josephs, I. E. (2002). “The ‘Hopi in me’: The construction of a voice in the dialogical self from a cultural psychological perspective. Theory & Psychology, 12, 161–173.
Leiman, M. (2002). Toward semiotic dialogism: The role of sign mediation in the dialogical self. Theory & Psychology, 12, 221–235.
Leiman, M. (2004). Dialogical sequence analysis. In H. J. M. Hermans & G. Dimaggio (Eds.), The dialogical self in psychotherapy (pp. 255–269). Hove, East Sussex: Brunner-Routledge.
Leiman, M., & Stiles, W. B. (2001). Dialogical sequence analysis and the zone of proximal development as conceptual enhancements to the assimilation model: The case of Jan revisited. Psychotherapy Research, 11, 311–330.
Lévinas, E. (1969). Totality and infinity: An essay on exteriority (A. Lingis, Trans.). Pittsburgh, PA: Duquesne University Press.
Linell, P. (in preparation). Essentials of dialogism: Aspects and elements of a dialogical approach to language, communication and cognition. Unpublished manuscript.
Lyra, M. C. D. P. (in press). Mother-infant communication development and the emergence of self: The contributions of dynamic systems and dialogism. In C. Lightfoot, M. C. D. P. Lyra & J. Valsiner (Eds). Challenges and strategies for studying human development in cultural contexts. Greenwich, CT: Information Age Publishers.
Marková, I. (2003). Dialogicality and social representations. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Mead, G. H. (1988). Mind, self and society. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. (Original work published 1934).
Richardson, F., Rogers, A. & McCarroll, J. (1998). Toward a dialogical self. American Behavioral Scientist, 41, 496–515.
Salgado, J. (2002, October). Dialogical unconscious and psychotherapy: Giving voice to unspoken narratives. Paper presented at the Second International Conference on the Dialogical Self, Ghent, Belgium.
Salgado, J. (2003). Psicologia narrativa e identidade: Um estudo sobre auto-engano [Narrative psychology and self-identity: A study of self-deception]. Maia, Portugal: Publismai.
Salgado, J. & Ferreira, T. (2004, August). Dialogical relationships as triadic structures: Exploring a possibility. Paper presented on the Third International Conference on the Dialogical Self, Warsaw, Poland.
Salgado, J., & Hermans, H. J. M. (2005). The return of subjectivity: From a multiplicity of selves to the dialogical self. Electronic-Journal of Applied Psychology, 1, 3–13.
Sarbin, T. R. (1986). The narrative as a root methaphor for psychology. In T. R. Sarbin (Ed.), Narrative psychology: The storied nature of human conduct (pp. 3–21). New York: Praeger.
Stern, D. N. (2000). The interpersonal world of the infant (paperback edition). New York: Basic Books.
Stern, D. N. (2004).The present moment in psychotherapy and everyday life. New York: W. W. Norton.
Trevarthen, C., & Aitken, K. J. (2001). Infant intersubjectivity: Research, theory, and clinical applications. Journal of Child Psychological Psychiatry, 42, 3–48,
Valsiner, J. (2000, June). Making meaning out of mind: Self-less and self-full dialogicality. Keynote lecture presented at the First International Conference on the Dialogical Self, Nijmegen, The Netherlands.
Valsiner, J. (2002). Forms of dialogical relations and semiotic autoregulation within the self. Theory & Psychology, 12, 251–265.
Valsiner, J. (2004, August). Temporal integration of structures within the dialogical self. Keynote lecture presented at the Third International Conference on the Dialogical Self, Warsaw, Poland.
Valsiner, J. (2005). Soziale und emotionale Entwicklungsaufgaben im kulturellen Kontext. In J. Asendorpf (Eds.), Enzyklpädie der Psychologie: Soziale, emotionale und Persönlichkleitsentwicklung (Vol. 3). Göttingen: Hogrefe.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1978). Mind in society: The development of higher psychological processes. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Watzlawick, P., Beavin, J. H., & Jackson, D. D. (1967). Pragmatics of human communication: A study of interactional patterns, pathologies and paradoxes. New York: Norton.
Wittgenstein, L. (1953). Philosophical investigations. Blackwell Publishers.
Wortham, S. (2001). The narratives in action: A strategy for research and analysis. New York: Teachers College Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Assmann, J. (1995). Collective Memory and Cultural Identity. New German Critique, 65, 125–33.
Baddeley, A. (1990). Human Memory: Theory and practice. Hove: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Barclay, C. R. & Smith, T. S. 1992. Autobiographical Remembering: Creating Personal Culture. In M. A. Conway, D. C. Rubin, H. Spinnler, & W. A. Wagenaar, (Eds.), Theoretical Perspectives on Autobiographical Memory (pp. 75–97). Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Press.
Bartlett, F. C. (1932). Remembering: A Study in Experimental and Social Psychology. Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press.
Baumeister, R. F. & Hastings, S. (1997). Distortions of Collective Memory: How groups flatter and deceive themselves. In J. W. Pennebaker, D. Paez, & B. Rimé, (Eds.), Collective Memory of Political Events (pp. 277–293). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Bellelli, G. (1999). Ricordo di un giudice. Uno studio sulle flashbulb memories [Remembering a judge: A study on flashbulb memories]. Napoli: Liguori.
Bellelli, G., Curci, A. & Leone, G. (2000). Ricordi indimenticabili. Determinanti della memorabilità collettiva di eventi pubblici [Unforgettable memories. Determinants of the accessibility of public events]. Psychofenia, 4–5, 83–110.
Beristain, C. M., Paez, D. & Gonzalez, J. L. (2000). Rituals, social sharing, silence, emotions and collective memory claims in the case of Guatemalan genocide. Psicothema, 12, 117–130.
Blum-Kulka, S. & Snow, C. E. (1992). Developing Autonomy For Tellers, Tales, And Telling In Family Narrative Events. Journal of Narrative And Life History, 2, 187–217.
Bohannon, J. N. (1988). Flashbulb memories for the Space Shuttle disaster: A tale of two theories. Cognition, 29, 179–196.
Brossart, A. (1992). URSS/Polonia/RDA. El quinquagesimo aniversario del pacto germano-sovietico [The 50th anniversary of the german-soviet pact]. In A. Brossart, S. Combe, J. Y. Potel, & J. C. Szurek, (Eds.), En el Este, la memoria recuperada. Valencia: Alfons el Magnanim.
Brown, R. & Kulik, J. (1977). Flashbulb Memories. Cognition, 5, 73–99.
Christianson, S. Å. 1989. Flashbulb memories: Special, but not so special. Memory & Cognition, 17, 435–443.
Ciompi, L. (1997). On the emotional bases of thinking. Fractal affect-logic and communication. System families, 10, 128–134.
Cole, J. (2004). Painful memories, ritual and the transformation of community trauma. Culture, Medicine and Psychiatry, 28, 87–105.
Collins, R. (2004). Rituals of solidarity in the wake of Terrorist attacks. Sociological Theory, 22, 53–87.
Connerton, P. (1989). How societies remember. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Conway, M. A. (1995). Flashbulb Memories. Hove: Erlbaum.
Conway, M. A. (1997). The inventory of experience: Memory and identity. In J. W. Pennebaker, D. Paez, & B. Rimé, (Eds.), Collective memory of political events. Social Psychological perspectives (pp. 21–45). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Conway, M. A., Anderson, S. J., Larsen, S. F., Donelly, C. M., McDaniel, M. A., McClelland, A. G. R., Rawles, R. E. & Logie, R. H. (1994). The formation of flashbulb memories. Memory & Cognition, 22, 326–343.
Conway, M. A. & Pleydell-Pearce, C. W. (2000). The construction of autobiographical memories in the self-memory system. Psychological Review, 107, 261–288.
Curci, A. (2002). I was there. 6 studi sulle flashbulb memories [I was there. Six studies on Flashbulb memories]. Unpublished doctoral thesis: University of Bari.
Curci, A. (2005). Latent Variable Models for the Measurement of Flashbulb Memories: A comparative approach. Applied Cognitive Psychology, 19, 3–22.
Curci, A., Luminet, O., Finkenauer, C. & Gisle, L. (2001). Flashbulb memories in social groups: A comparative test-retest study of the memory of French President Mitterand's death in a French and a Belgian group. Memory, 9, 81–101.
Dias, F. P., Marques, J. M. & Paez, D. (2000). Dealing with shame: Effects of group membership on the transmission of negative historical events, Unpublished manuscript, University of Porto.
Duck, J. M., Hogg, M. A. & Terry, D. J. (2000). The perceived impact of persuasive messages on “us” and “them”. In D. J. Terry & M. A. Hogg, (Eds.), 2000. Attitudes, behavior, and social context: The role of norms and group membership. Applied social research (pp. 265–291). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Durkheim, E. (1898). Représentations individuelles et représentations collectives. Revue de métaphysique et de morale, 6, 273–302.
Durkheim, É. (1912). Les Formes élémentaires de la vie religieuse: le système totémique en Australie. Paris: Alcan.
Edy, J. A. (1999). Journalistic uses of collective memory. Journal of Communication, 49, 71–85.
Er, N. (2003). A new Flashbulb memory model applied to the Marmara earthquake. Applied Cognitive Psychology, 17, 503–517.
Erickson, E. (1950). Childhood and society. New York: Norton.
Festinger, L. (1954). A theory of social comparison processes. Human Relations, 7, 117–140.
Finkenauer, C., Luminet, O., Gilse, L., El-Ahmadi, A., Van Der Linden, M. & Philippot, P. (1998). Flashbulb memories and the underlying mechanism of their formation: Toward an emotional-integrative model. Memory and Cognition, 26, 516–531.
Fitzgerald, J. M. (1988). Vivid memories and the reminiscence phenomenon: The role of self narrative. Human Development, 31, 261–273.
Franklin, H. C. & Holding, D. H. (1977). Personal memories at different ages. Quarterly Journal of Experimental Psychology, 29, 527–532.
Frijda, N. H. (1994). Universal antecedent exist, and are interesting. In P. Ekman & R. J. Davidson, (Eds.), The nature of emotion: Fundamental questions (pp. 155–162). New York: Oxford University Press.
Frjida, N. H. (1997). Commemorating. In J. W. Pennebaker, D. Paez & B. Rimé, (Eds.), Collective Memory of Political Events (pp. 103–127). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Frijda, N. H., Kuipers, P. & ter Schure, E. (1989). Relations among emotion, appraisal, and emotional action readiness. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 57, 212–228.
Guimelli, C. (1999). La Pensée Sociale [The Social Thinking]. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
Halbwachs, M. (1925/1975). Les cadres sociaux de la mémoire [The social frames of memory]. Paris: Mouton.
Halbwachs, M. (1950). La mémoire collective [The collective memory]. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
Holmes, A. & Conway, M. A. (1999). Generation identity and the reminiscence bump: Memories for public and private events. Journal of Adult Development, 6, 21–34.
Kelman, H. C. (2001). The role of national identity in conflict resolution: experiences from Israeli-Palestinian problem-solving workshops. In R. D. Ashmore & L. Jussim, (Eds.), Social identity, intergroup conflict, and conflict reduction. Rutgers series on self and social identity (vol. 3, pp. 187–212). London: Oxford University Press.
Kenwyn, S. K. & Crandell, S. D. (1984). Exploring collective emotion. American Behavioral Scientist 27, 813–828.
Knapp, R. H. (1944). A psychology of rumour. Public Opinion Quarterly, 8, 22–37.
Knightley, P. (1975). The first casualty. New York: Harcourt Brace.
Kvavilashvili, L., Mirani, J., Schlagman, S. & Kornbrot, D. E. (2003). Comparing Flashbulb memories of September 11 and death of Princess Diana: Effects of time delays and nationality. Applied Cognitive Psychology, 17, 1017–1031.
Larsen, S. F. (1988). Remembering without experiencing: Memory for reported events. In U. Neisser & E. Winograd, (Eds.), Remembering reconsidered. Ecological and traditional approaches to the study of memory (pp. 326–355). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Larsen, S. F. (1992). Potential flashbulb: Memories of ordinary news as the baseline. In E. Winograd & U. Neisser, (Eds.), Affect and accuracy in recall: Studies of “flashbulb memories” (pp. 32–64). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Leone, G. (1996). Il futuro alle spalle. La memoria sociale e collettiva nei lavori di Bartlett, Vygotsky e Halbwachs [The Future from behind. The social and collective memory in the Bartlett, Vygotsky and Halbwachs's work]. Rassegna di Psicologia, XIII, 3, 91–130.
Leone G. (2000). Cosa è sociale nella memoria? [What is Social in memory?] In G. Bellelli, D. Bakhurst, & A. Rosa, (Eds.), Tracce. Memoria collettiva e identità sociali (pp. 49–69). Napoli: Liguori.
Leone, G., Mazzara, B., Contarello, A. & Volpato, C. (2004). Monitoring the reconciliation processes: some theoretical and methodological issues. Paper presented in the EAESP Small Group Meeting, War and Peace Conference, Genève, 11–13 Sept. 2004.
Lewis, B. (1975). History: remembered, recovered, invented. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Livingston, R. B. (1967). Brain circuitry relating to complex behavior. In G. C. Quarton, T. Melnechuck & F. O. Schmitt, (Eds.), The neurosciences: A study program (pp. 499–514). New York: Rockefeller University Press.
Luminet, O., Curci, A., Marsh, E., Wessel, I., Constantin, T., Gencoz, F. & Yogo, M. (2004). The Cognitive, Emotional, and Social Impacts of the September, 11 Attacks: Group Differences in Memory for the Reception Context and the Determinants of Flashbulb Memory. The Journal of General Psychology, 131, 197–224.
Mannheim, K. (1928/1952). The problem of generations. In K. Mannheim, Essays on the sociology of knowledge. London: Routledge & Kegan.
Marques, J., Paez, D. & Serra, A. F. (1997). Social sharing, emotional climate, and the transgenerational transmission of memories: The Portuguese colonial war. In J. W. Pennebaker, D. Paez & B. Rimé, (Eds.), Collective Memory of Political Events (pp. 253–275). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Martin, L. & Tesser, A. (1989). Toward a motivational and structural theory of ruminative thought. In J. S. Ulman & J. A. Bargh, (Eds.), Unintended thoughts (pp. 306–326). New York: Guilford.
Mazzara B. M. & Leone G. (2001). Collective memory and intergroup relations. Revista de Psicologia Social, 16, 349–367.
Mc Adams, D. P. (1985). Power, intimacy, and the life story. Personological inquiries into identity. New York: Guilford Press.
McCloskey, M., Wible, C. G. & Cohen, N. J. (1988). Is There a Special Flashbulb-Memory Mechanism?Journal of Experimental Psychology, 117, 171–181.
Middleton, D. & Edwards, D., (Eds.), (1990). Collective Remembering. London: Sage.
Miller, P. J. (1994). Narrative Practices: Their Role In Socialization And Self-Construction, In U. Neisser & R. Fivush, (Eds.), The Remembering Self: Construction And Accuracy In The Self-Narratives (pp. 158–179). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Moscovici, S. (1976). La psychanalyse, son image, son public. 2nd (Ed.), Paris: Presse Universitaires de France. 1961.
Nadler, A. (2002). Post resolution processes: Instrumental and socioemotional routes to reconciliation. In G. Salomon & B. Nevo, (Eds.), Peace education: The concept, principles, and practices around the world (pp. 127–141). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Neal, A. G. (1998). National Trauma and Collective Memory. Armonk: M. E. Sharpe.
Neisser, U. (1982). Snapshots or benchmarks? In U. Neisser, (Ed.), Memory observed (pp. 43–48). San Francisco: Freeman.
Neisser, U. & Harsch, N. (1992). Phantom flashbulbs: False recollections of hearing the news about Challenger. In E. Winograd & U. Neisser, (Eds.), Affect and accuracy in recall: Studies of “flashbulb memories” (pp. 9–31). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Paez, D., Rimé, B. & Besabe, N. (2005). Un modelo socio-cultural de los rituals. Efectos de las traumas colectivos y procesos psico-sociales de afrontamiento con referencia a las manifestaciones del 11-M. [A socio-cultural model of rituals. Effects of collective traumas and psycho-social coping processes with reference to the March-Eleventh demonstrations]. Revista de Psicologia Social, 20, 369–385.
Paez, D., Valencia, J., Besabe, N., Harranz, K. & Gonzalez, J. L. (2000). Identità, comunicazione e memoria collettiva [Identity, communication and collective memory]. In G. Bellelli, D. Bakhurst & A. Rosa, (Eds.) 2000. Tracce. Studi sulla memoria collettiva (pp. 139–167). Napoli: Liguori.
Pennebaker, J. W. (1990). Opening up: The healing power of confiding in others. New York: Morrow.
Pennebaker, J. W. & Banasik, B. L (1997). On the creation and maintenance of collective memories: History as Social Psychology. In J. W. Pennebaker, D. Paez & B. Rimé, (Eds.), Collective Memory of Political Events (pp. 3–19). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Pennebaker, J. W., Paez, D. & Rimé, B., (Eds.), (1997). Collective Memory of Political Events. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Pennebaker, J. W., Rentfrow, J., Davis, M., Paez, D. & Bellelli, G. (2000). The Social Psychology of History: Defining the most important events of the last 10,100, and 1000 years http://homepage.psy.utexas.edu/homepage/faculty/Pennebaker/Reprints/Millennium.doc
Pillemer, D. B. (1984). Flashbulb memories of the assassination attempt on President Reagan. Cognition, 16, 63–80.
Price, V. (1989). Social identification and public opinion: Effects of communicating group conflict. Public Opinion Quarterly, 532, 197–224.
Proust, M. (1913). Du côté de chez Swann. Paris: Grasset.
Ribot, T. (1882). Diseases of memory: An essay in the Positive Psychology. New York: Appleton.
Ricoeur, P. (1998). Dar Ratsel der Vergangenheit. – Vergessen – Verzeihen [Remember, forget, forgive]. Gottinghen: Wallstein.
Rimé, B., Finkenauer, C., Luminet, O., Zech, E. & Philippot, P. (1998). Social sharing of emotion: New evidence and new questions. In W. Stroebe & M. Hewstone, (Eds.), European Review of Social Psychology (vol. 8, pp. 145–189). Chichester: Wiley & Sons Ltd.
Robinson, J. A. (1986). Autobiographical memory: An historical prologue. In D. C. Rubin, (Ed.), Autobiographical memory (pp. 19–24). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Robinson, W. P. (1996). Deceit, delusion, and Detection. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Rosa, A., Bellelli, G. & Bakhurst, D., (Eds.), (2000). Memoria colectiva e identidad social [Collective Memory and social identity]. Madrid: Biblioteca Nueva.
Rubin, D., Rahhal, T. A. & Poon, L. W. (1998). Things earned in early adulthood are remembered best. Memory & Cognition, 26, 3–19.
Salomon, G. & Nevo, B., (Eds.), (2002). Peace Education: The Concept, Principles and Practices Around the World. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Schuman, H. & Rieger, C. (1992). Collective memory and collective memories. In M. A. Conway, D. C. Rubin, H. Spinnler & W. Wagenaar, (Eds.), Theoretical perspectives on autobiographical memory (pp. 323–336). Dordrecht, The Netherlands: Kluwer.
Schuman, H., & Scott, J. (1989). Generations and collective memory. American Sociological Review, 54, 359–381.
Scott, J. & Zac, L. (1993). Collective memories in Britain and the United States. Public Opinion Quarterly, 57, 315–331.
Shum, M. S. (1998). The role of temporal landmarks in autobiographical memory processes. Psychological Bulletin, 124, 423–442.
Silverstein, B. (1992). The psychology of enemy images. In S. Staub & P. Green, (Eds.), Psychology and social responsibility: Facing global challenges (pp. 145–162). New York: New York University Press.
Tait, R. & Silver, R. C. (1989). Coming to terms with major negative life events. In J. S. Uleman & J. A. Bargh, (Eds.), Unintended thoughts (pp. 351–382). New York: Guilford.
Tavuchis, N. (1991). Mea culpa. A Sociology of apology and reconciliation. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
Valsiner, J. (1987). Culture and the Development of Children's Actions. A Cultural-Historical Theory of Developmental Psychology. Chichester: John Wiley and Sons.
Weaver, C. A., III. (1993). Do You Need a “Flash” to Form a Flashbulb Memory? Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 122, 39–46.
Withehouse, H. (2002). Arguments and Icons. Divergent modes of Religiosity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Wright, D. B. (1993). Recall of the Hillsborough disaster over time: Systematic biases of ‘Flashbulb’ Memories. Applied Cognitive Psychology, 7, 129–138.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Bakhtin, M. M. (1984). Problems of Dostoevsky's poetics. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. (Edited and translated by C. Emerson)
Bakhtin, M. M. (1986). The problem of the text in linguistics, philology, and the human sciences: An experiment in philosophical analysis. In Bakhtin, M. M. (1986). Speech genres & other late essays. Austin: University Texas Press, (pp. 103–131). (Translated by Vern W. McGee; edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist).
Bartlett, F. C. (1995). Remembering: A study in experimental and social psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (First published in 1932).
Bechtel, W. & Abrahamsen, A. (1991). Connectionism and the mind: An introduction to parallel processing in networks. Oxford: Blackwell.
Bodnar, J. (1992). Remaking America: Public memory, commemoration, and patriotism in the twentieth century. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Burke, P. (1989). History as social memory. In T. Butler, (Ed.), Memory: History, culture and the mind (pp. 97–113). Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
Bruner, J. (1990). Acts of meaning. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Chang, I. (1997). The rape of Nanking: The forgotten holocaust of World War II. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin.
Cole, J. (2001). Forget colonialism? Sacrifice and the art of memory in Madagascar. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Connerton, P. (1989). How societies remember. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Conway, M. A. (1997). The inventory of experience: Memory and identity. In J. W. Pennebaker, D. Paez, & B. Rimé, (Eds.), Collective memory of political events: Social psychological perspectives, pp. 21–45.
Conway, M. A. & Playdell-Pearce, C. W. (2000). The construction of autobiographical memories in the self-memory system. Psychological review, 107(2), 261–288.
Donald, M. (1991). Origins of the modern mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Douglas, M. (1980). Introduction: Maurice Halbwachs (1877–1945). In Halbwachs, M. (1980). The collective memory. New York: Harper & Row. (Translated by Francis J. Didder, Jr. and Vida Yazdi Ditter)
Dower, J. W. (1996). Three narratives of our humanity. In Linenthal, E. T. & Engelhardt, T. (Eds.), History wars: The Enola Gay and other battles for America's past (pp. 63–96). New York: Metropolitan Books.
Fitzgerald, J. M. (1988). Vivid memories and the reminiscence phenomenon: The role of a self narrative. Human Development, 31, 261–273.
Fitzgerald, J. M. (1995). Intersecting meanings of reminiscence in adult development and aging. In D. C. Rubin, (Ed.), Remembering our past: Studies in autobiographical memory (pp. 360–383). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Hacking, I. (1996). Memory sciences, memory politics. In P. Antze, & M. Lambek, (Eds.), Tense past: Cultural essays in trauma and memory (pp. 67–87). New York: Routledge.
Halbwachs, M. (1980). The collective memory. New York: Harper & Row. (Translated by Francis J. Didder, Jr. and Vida Yazdi Ditter)
Halbwachs, M. (1992). On collective memory. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. (Edited, translated, and with an introduction by Lewis A. Coser)
Klein, K. L. (2000). On the emergence of memory in historical discourse. Representations, 69, Winter 2000, pp. 127–150.
Leont'ev, A. N. (1981). The problem of activity in psychology. In J. V. Wertsch, (Ed.), The concept of activity in Soviet psychology (pp. 37–71). Armonk, NY: M.E. Sharpe.
Linenthal, E. T. (1996). Anatomy of a controversy. In Linenthal, E. T. & Engelhardt, T. (Eds.), (1996). History wars: The Enola Gay and other battles for America's past (pp. 9–62). New York: Metropolitan Books.
Linenthal, E. T. & Engelhardt, T. (Eds.), (1996). History wars: The Enola Gay and other battles for America's past. New York: Metropolitan Books.
Lotman, Yu. M. & Uspenskii, B. A. (1985). Binary models in the dynamics of Russian culture (to the end of the eighteenth century). In A. D. Nakhimovsky & A. S. Nakhimovsky, (Eds.), The semiotics of Russian cultural history. Essays by Iurii M. Lotman, Lidiia Ia. Ginsburg, Boris A. Uspenskii (pp. 30–66). Ithaca: Cornell University Press.
Lowenthal, D. (1994). Identity, heritage, and history. In J. R. Gillis, (Ed.), Commemorations: The politics of national identity (pp. 41–57). Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Lukes, S. (1977). Methodological individualism reconsidered. In S. Lukes, (Ed.), Essays in social theory (pp. 177–186). New York: Columbia University Press.
MacIntyre, A. (1984). After virtue: A study in moral theory. Notre Dame, IN: University of Notre Dame Press.
Mannheim, K. (1952). The problem of generations. Chapter VII. In: K. Mannheim. Essays on the sociology of knowledge (pp. 276–320). London: Routledge & Kegan Paul Ltd. (Edited by Paul Kecskemeti)
Middleton, D. & Edwards, D. (1990). Conversational remembering: A social psychological approach. In D. Middleton & D. Edwards, (1990), (Eds.), Collective remembering (pp. 23–45). London: Sage Publications.
Middleton, D. & Brown, S. D. (2005). Social psychology of experience: Studies in remembering and forgetting. New York: Sage.
Mink, L. O. (1978). Narrative form as a cognitive instrument. In R. H. Canary and H. Kozicki (Eds.), The writing of history: Literary form and historical understanding (pp. 129–149). Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.
Musatova, M. M. (2002). “Uzkie uchastki” ekonomicheskogo rosta Rossii v usloviyakh globalizatskii. [“Narrow sectors” of economic growth in Russia in conditions of globalization]. Sb. Nauch. Tr – Novosibirsk; NGU [Collected Scientific Works – Novosibirsk; Novosibirsk State Uiversity], pp. 108–114.
Nora, P. (1989). Between memory and history: Les lieux de mémoire. Representations, Spring 1989, 26, 7–25.
Novick, P. (1999). The Holocaust in American life. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.
Pennebaker, J. W., D. Paez, & B. Rimé, (Eds.), (1997). Collective memory of political events: Social psychological perspectives. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Propp, V. (1968). Morphology of the folktale. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press. (Translated by Laurence Scott)
Roediger, H. L. & K. B. McDermott (1995). Creating false memories: Remembering words not presented in lists. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 21, 803–814.
Ross, M. (1989). Relation of implicit theories to the construction of personal histories. Psychological Review, 96(2), 341–357.
Schacter, D. L., (Ed.), (1995). Memory distortion: How minds, brains, and societies reconstruct the past. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Schacter, D. L. (1996). Searching for memory: The brain, the mind, and the past. New York: Basic Books.
Schudson, M. (1992). Watergate in American memory: How we remember, forget, and reconstruct the past. New York: Basic Books.
Schuman, H., B. Schwartz, & H. D'Arcy. (2005). Elite revisionists and popular beliefs: Christopher Columbus, hero or villain? Public Opinion Quarterly, 69(1), spring 2005, 2–29.
Schuman, H. & J. Scott. (1989). Generations and collective memories. American Sociological Review, 4(54, June), 359–381.
Seixas, P. (Ed.), (2004). Theorizing historical consciousness. Toronto: University of Toronto Press.
Stock, B. (1990). Listening for the text: On the uses of the past.Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
Taylor, C. (1989) Sources of the self: The making of modern identity. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1981). The instrumental method in psychology. In J. V. Wertsch, (Ed.), The concept of activity in Soviet psychology (pp. 134–143). Armonk, NY: M.E. Sharpe.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1987). The collected works of L. S. Vygotsky. volume 1. Problems of general psychology. Including the Volume Thinking and speech. New York: Plenum. (Edited and translated by N. Minick)
Weldon, M. S. (2001). Remembering as a social process. In D. L. Medin, (Ed.), The psychology of learning and motivation (pp. 67–120). San Diego: Academic Press.
Wertsch, J. V. (1994). Struggling with the past: Some dynamics of historical representation. In M. Carretero & J. F. Voss, (Eds.), Cognitive and instructional processes in history and the social sciences (pp. 323– 338).
Wertsch, J. V. & O'Connor, K. (1994). Multivoicedness in historical representation: American college students' accounts of the origins of the U. S. Journal of Narrative and Life History, 4(4), 295–310.
Wertsch, J. V. (1998). Mind as action. New York: Oxford University Press.
Wertsch, J. V. (2002). Voices of collective remembering. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Wertsch, J. V. (2003). Filling in the blank spots in history: The Molotov-Ribbentrop Pact in Russian collective memory. Paper presented at the conference “Memory and War” at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, January, 2003.
White, H. (1987). The content of the form: Narrative discourse and historical representation. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University Press.
Young, A. (1996). Bodily memory and traumatic memory. In P. Antze & M. Lambek, (Eds.), Tense past: Cultural essays in trauma and memory (pp. 89–102). New York: Routledge.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Antze, P., & Lambek, M. (Eds.), (1996). Tense past: Cultural essays in trauma and memory. New York; London: Routledge.
Ashmore, M., MacMillan, K., & Brown, S. D. (2004). It's a scream: Professional hearing and tape fetishism. Journal of Pragmatics, 36, 349–374.
Atkinson, R. C., & Schiffrin, R. M. (1968). Human memory: A proposed system and its control processes. In K. Spence & J. Spence (Eds.), The psychology of learning and motivation, Vol. 2. New York: Academic Press.
Baddeley, A. D. (1976). The psychology of memory. London: Harper & Row.
Baddeley, A. D. (1982). Domains of recollection. Psychological Review, 89, 708–729.
Bangerter, A. (2000). Identifying individual and collective acts of remembering in task related communication. Discourse Processes, 30, 237–264.
Bangerter, A. (2002). Maintaining task continuity: The role of collective memory processes in redistributing information. Group Processes and Intergroup Relations, 5, 203–219.
Barclay, C. R. (1994). Collective remembering. Semiotica, 101(3/4), 323–330.
Bartlett, F. C. (1932). Remembering: A study in experimental and social psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Bartlett, F. C. (1958). Thinking: An experimental and social study. London: George Allen & Unwin.
Bloch, M. E. (1998). How we think they think: Anthropological approaches to cognition, memory and literacy. Boulder, Colorado: Westview Press.
Brockmeier, J. (2002). Remembering and forgetting: Narrative as cultural memory. Culture and Psychology, 8(1), 15–43.
Bruner, J. S., & Feldman, C. (1996). Group narrative as a cultural context of autobiography. In D. Rubin (Ed.), Remembering our past: Studies in autobiographical memory, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Casey, E. S. (1987). Remembering: A phenomenological study. Bloomington & Indianapolis: Indiana University Press.
Cohen, G. (1990). Memory and the real world. London: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Cole, M. (1996). Cultural psychology: A once and future discipline. Cambridge, Massachusetts: The Belknap Press of the Harvard University Press.
Cole, J. (1998). The work of memory in Madagascar. American Ethnologist, 25(4), 610–633.
Cole, J. (2001). Forget colonialism? Sacrifice and the art of memory in Madagascar. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Connerton, P. (1989). How societies remember. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Conway, M. A. (1992). In defense of everyday memory. American Psychologist, 46, 19–26.
Daniels, H. (1996). An introduction to Vygotsky. London: Routledge.
Daniels, H. (2001). Vygotsky and pedagogy. London: Routledge.
Danziger, K. (2002). How old is psychology, particularly concepts of memory. History and Philosophy of Psychology, 4(1), 1–12.
Douglas, M. (1992). The person in an enterprise culture. In S. H. Heap & A. Ross (Eds.), Understanding the enterprise culture: Themes in the work of Mary Douglas (pp. 41–62). Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.
Ebbinghaus, H. (1885/1964). Memory: A contribution to experimental psychology. New York: Dover.
Edwards, D., & Middleton, D. (1986). Text for memory: Joint recall with a scribe, Human Learning, 5, 125–138.
Edwards, D., & Potter, J. (1992). Discursive psychology. London: Sage.
Engeström, Y. (1987). Learning by expanding. Helsinki: Orienta-Konsultit Oy.
Fentress, J., & Wickham, C. (1992). Social memory. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
Geertz, C. (1973). The interpretation of cultures. New York: Basic Books.
Hacking, I. (1995). Rewriting the soul: Multiple personality and the sciences of memory. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press.
Hirst, W., & Manier, D. (1996). Opening vistas for cognitive psychology. In L. Martin, B. Rogoff, K. Nelson & E. Tolbach (Eds.), Sociocultural Psychology (pp. 89–124). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Irwin-Zarecka, I. (1993). Frames of remembrance: social and cultural dynamics of collective memory. New Brunswick, New Jersey: Transaction.
James, W. (1890/1950). The principles of psychology. New York: Dover.
Kashima, Y. (2000). Recovering Bartlett's social psychology of cultural dynamics. European Journal of Social Psychology, 30, 383–403.
Klein, K. L. (2000). On the emergence of memory in historical discourse. Representations, 69 (Winter), 127–150.
Locke, J. (transcribed and edited by P. H. Niddtch) (1690/1975). Essay concerning human understanding. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Loftus, E. F. (1979). Eyewitness testimony. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Loftus, E. F., & Ketchum, K. (1994). Tricked by memory. In Jaclyn Jeffrey and Glenace Edwall (Eds.), Memory and history: Essays on recalling and interpreting experience (pp. 17–32). Boston: University Press of America.
Middleton, D., & Brown, S. D. (2005). The social psychology of experience: Studies in remembering and forgetting. London: Sage Publications
Middleton, D., & Edwards, D. (1990). Collective remembering. London: Sage.
Misztal, B. A. (2003). Theories of social remembering. Buckingham: Open University Press.
Neisser, U. (1967). Cognitive psychology. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
Neisser, U. (1982). Memory observed: Remembering in natural contexts. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman and Company.
Neisser, U., & Winograd, E. (1988). Remembering reconsidered: Ecological and traditional approaches to the study of memory. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Norrick, N. R. (2000). Conversational Narrative: Story telling in everyday conversation. Amsterdam: John Benjamins Publishing Company.
Olick, J. K., & Robbins, J. (1998). Social memory studies: From ‘collective memory’ to the historical sociology of mnemonic practices. Annual Review of Sociology, 24, 105–140.
Pezdek, K., & Banks, W. P. (Eds.), (1996). The recovered memory/false memory debate. London: Academic Press.
Rosa, A. (1996). Bartlett's psycho-anthropological project. Culture & Psychology, 2(2), 355–378.
Rose, N. (1989). Governing the soul: The shaping of the private self. London: Routledge.
Rose, N. (1996). Inventing our selves: Psychology, power and personhood. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Rumelhart, D. E. (1975). Notes on a schema for stories. In D. G. Brobrow and A. M. Collins. (Eds.), Representation and understanding: Studies in cognitive science. New York: Academic Press.
Sandage, S. (1993). A Marble House Divided: The Lincoln Memorial, the Civil Rights Movement and the Politics of Memory, 1939–1963. Journal of American History, 80:1, 135–67.
Schacter, D. L. (1996). Searching for memory: The brain, the mind, and the past. New York: Basic Books.
Schank, R. C. (1982). Dynamic memory: A theory of reminding and learning in computers and people. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Schudson, M. (1992). Watergate in American memory: How we remember, forget and reconstruct the past. New York: Basic Books.
Schwartz, B. (2000). Abraham Lincoln and the forge of national memory. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Stephenson, G. M., Kniveton, B. H., & Wagner, W. (1991). Social influences on remembering: Intellectual, interpersonal and intergroup components. European Journal of Social Psychology, 21(6), 463–475.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1987). Thought and language. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Wegner, D. (1986). Transactive memory. In B. Mullen & G. Goethals (Eds.), Theories of group behavior. New York: Springer-Verlag.
Weldon, M. S. (2001). Remembering as a social process. In D. L. Medin. (Ed.), The psychology of learning and motivation (pp. 67–120). San Diego: Academic Press.
Weldon, M. S., & Bellinger, K. D. (1997). Collective memory: Collaborative and individual processes in remembering. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory & Cognition, 23, 1160–1175.
Wertsch, J. V. (2002). Voices of collective remembering. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Zelizer, B. (1992). Covering the body: The Kennedy assassination, the media, and the shaping of collective memory. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Zelizer, B. (1995). Reading the past against the grain: The shape of memory studies. Critical Studies in Mass Communication, 12, 214–239.
Zerubavel, E. (1996). Social memories: Steps to a sociology of the past. Qualitative Sociology, 19(3), 283–299.
Zerubavel, E. (1997). Social mindscapes: An invitation to cognitive sociology. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Bain, R. (1936). The self-and-other words of a child. The American Journal of Sociology, 41(6), 767–775.
Bakhtin, M. (1923/1990). Author and hero in aesthetic activity (Translated by V. Liapunov). In M. Holquist & V. Liapunov (Eds.), Art and answerability: early philosophical essays by M. M. Bakhtin (Vol. 9). Austin, Texas: University of Texas Press.
Bauer, M. W., & Gaskell, G. (1999). Towards a paradigm for research on social representations. Journal for the Theory of Social Behaviour, 29(2), 163–186.
Bruner, J. (1986). Actual minds, possible worlds. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Cole, M. (1996). Cultural psychology: A once and future discipline. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Cooley, C. H. (1902). Human nature and the social order. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons.
Cooley, C. H. (1908). A study of the early use of the self-words by a child. Psychological Review, 15, 339–357.
Dewey, J. (1896). The reflex arc concept in psychology. Psychological Review, 3(July), 357–370.
Doise, W., & Mugny, G. (1984). The social development of the intellect. Oxford: Pergammon.
Engeström, Y. (1987). Learning by expanding: An activity-theoretical approach to developmental research. Helsinki: Orienta Konsultit.
Engeström, Y., Brown, K., Christopher, L. C., & Gregory, J. (1997). Coordination, cooperation and communication in the courts: Expansive transitions in legal work. In M. Cole & Y. Engestrom & O. Vasquez (Eds.), Mind, culture and activity: Seminal papers from the Laboratory of Comparative Human Cognition (pp. 369–385). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Farr, R. M. (1997). The significance of the skin as a natural boundary in the sub-division of psychology. Journal for the Theory of Social Behaviour, 27(2–3), 305–323.
Gergely, G., & Watson, J. S. (1996). The social biofeedback theory of parental affect-mirroring: The development of emotional self-awareness and self-control in infancy. International Journal of Psychoanalysis, 77(6), 1181–1212.
Gillespie, A. (2003). Surplus & supplementarity: Moving between the dimensions of otherness. Culture & Psychology, 9(3), 209–220.
Gillespie, A. (2005). G. H. Mead: Theorist of the social act. Journal for the Theory of Social Behaviour, 35(1), 19–39.
Gillespie, A. (2006). Becoming other: From social interaction to self-reflection. Greenwich, CT: Information Age Publishing.
Harré, R., & Van Langenhove, L. (1991). Varieties of positioning. Journal for the Theory of Social Behaviour, 21(4).
Hermans, H. J. M. (2001). The Dialogical Self: Toward a theory of personal and cultural positioning. Culture & Psychology, 7(3), 243–281.
Ichheiser, G. (1949). Misunderstandings in human relations: A study in false social perception. American Journal of Sociology, 55 (suppl.), 1–72.
Josephs, I. E. (2002). ‘The Hopi in Me’: The construction of a voice in the dialogical self from a cultural psychological perspective. Theory & Psychology, 12(2), 161–173.
Jovchelovitch, S. (1995). Social Representations in and of the public sphere: Towards a theoretical articulation. Journal for the Theory of Social Behaviour, 25, 81–102.
Lacan, J. (1949/1977). The mirror stage as formative of the function of the I as revealed in psychoanalytic theory, Ecrits: A selection. London: Tavistock Publications.
Lawrence, J. A., & Valsiner, J. (1993). Conceptual roots of internalization: From transmission to transformation. Human Development, 36, 150–167.
Lundgren, D. C. (2004). Social feedback and self-appraisals: Current status of the Mead-Cooley hypothesis. Symbolic Interaction, 27(2), 267–286.
Marková, I. (1982). Paradigms, thought and language. Chichester: Wiley.
Matusov, E. (1998). When solo activity is not privileged: Participation and internalization models of development. Human Development, 41, 326–354.
Mead, G. H. (1910). Social consciousness and the consciousness of meaning. Psychological Bulletin, 6, 401–408.
Mead, G. H. (1912). The mechanism of social consciousness. The Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, 9(15), 401–406.
Mead, G. H. (1922). A behavioristic account of the significant symbol. Journal of Philosophy, 19(6), 157–163.
Moscovici, S. (1984). The phenomenon of social representations. In R. Farr & S. Moscovici (Eds.), Social Representations. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Nelson, K. (2000). Narrative, time and the emergence of the encultured self. Culture & Psychology, 6(2), 183–196.
Pavlov, I. P. (1951). Psychopathology and psychiatry: Selected works (D. Myshne & S. Belsky Trans.). Moscow: Foreign Languages Publishing House.
Peirce, C. S. (1878/1998). Charles S. Peirce: The essential writings (Edited by Edward C. Moore). New York: Prometheus Books.
Perret-Clermont, A. N. (1980). Social interaction and cognitive development in children. London: Academic Press.
Piaget, J. (1970). Piaget's theory. In P. H. Mussen (Ed.), Carmichael's manual of child psychology (3rd ed., pp. 703–732). New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Potter, J., & Wetherell, M. (1987). Discourse and social psychology. London: Sage Publications.
Prebensen, N. K., Larsen, S., & Abelsen, B. (2003). I'm not a typical tourist: German tourists' self-perception, activities, and motivations. Journal of Travel Research, 41(4), 416–420.
Psaltis, C., & Duveen, G. (under review). Social relations and cognitive development: The influence of conversation type and representations of gender. European Journal of Social Psychology.
Rommetveit, R. (1974). On message structure: A framework for the study of language and communication. London: John Wiley and Sons.
Shrauger, J. S., & Schoeneman, T. J. (1979). Symbolic interactionist view of self-concept. Psychological Bulletin, 86, 549–573.
Sigel, I. E. (2002). The psychological distancing model: A study of the socialization of cognition. Culture & Psychology, 8(2), 189–214.
Smith, A. (1759/1982). The theory of moral sentiments (Edited by D. D. Raphael & A. L. Macfie). Indianapolis, IN: Liberty Fund.
Tolman, C. W., & Piekkola, B. (1989). John Dewey and dialectical materialism: Anticipations of activity theory in the critique of the reflex arc concept. Activity Theory, 1(3–4), 43–46.
Valsiner, J. (1998). The Guided Mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Valsiner, J. (2001). Process structure of semiotic mediation in human development. Human Development, 44, 84–97.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1925/1999). Consciousness as a problem in the psychology of behavior. In N. N. Veresov (Ed.), Undiscovered Vygotsky: Etudes on the pre-history of cultural-historical psychology. Bern: Peter Lang Publishing.
Vygotsky, L. S., & Luria, A. (1930/1994). Tool and symbol in child development. In R. Van de Veer & J. Valsiner (Eds.), The Vygotsky Reader. Oxford: Blackwell.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1989). Concrete human psychology. Soviet Psychology, 27(2), 53–77.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1997). The collected works of L. S. Vygotsky (Volume 4, edited by R. W. Rieber) (Translated by M. J. Hall). New York: Plenum Press.
Wagner, W., Duveen, G., Themel, M., & Verma, J. (1999). The modernization of tradition: thinking about madness in Patna, India. Culture & Psychology, 5, 413–445.
Wertsch, J. V., & Stone, C. A. (1985). The concept of internalization in Vygotsky's account of the genesis of higher mental functions. In J. V. Wertsch (Ed.), Culture, communication and cognition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Zittoun, T., Duveen, G., Gillespie, A., Ivinson, G., & Psaltis, C. (2003). The use of symbolic resources in developmental transitions. Culture & Psychology, 9(4), 415–448.

Reference Title: References

Reference Type: reference-list

Bakhtin, M. M. (1981). The dialogical imagination. Austin: The University of Texas Press.
Barclay, C. R., & Smith, T. S. (1992). Autobiographical Remembering: Creating Personal Culture. In M. A. Conway; D. C. Rubin; H. Spinnler & E. A. Wagenaar (Eds.), (1992). Autobiographical memory (pp. 75–97). Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publisher.
Bourdieu, P. (1991). Language and symbolic power. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Branco, A. U., & Valsiner, J. (1997). Changing methodologies: A co-constructivist study of goal orientations in social interactions. Psychology and Developing Societies, 9, 1, 35–64.
Callon, M. (1986). Some Elements of a Sociology of Translation: Domestication of the Scallops and the Fishermen of St Brieuc Bay. In John Law (Ed.), Power, Action and Belief: A New Sociology of Knowledge (pp. 196–233). London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
Callon, M. 1991. Techno-economic networks and irreversibility. In John Law (Ed.), A Sociology of Monsters: Essays on Power, Technology and Domination (pp. 132–165). London: Routledge.
Cerezo, P. (Ed.), (2005). Democracia y virtudes cívicas. Madrid: Biblioteca Nueva.
Choi, S., Han, G., & Kim, C. (2007). Analysis of Cultural Emotion: Understanding of Indigenous Psychology for Universal Implications. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), The Cambridge Handbook of Socio-Cultural Psychology (pp. 310–342). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Cole, M., & Engeström, Y. (2007). Cultural-Historical Approaches to Designing for Development. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), The Cambridge Handbook of Socio-Cultural Psychology (pp. 434–507). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Collingwood, R. J. (1946/1976). The idea of History. New York: Oxford University Press.
Danto, A. C. (1985). Narration and Knowledge. New York: Columbia University Press.
de Certeau, M. (1984). The practice of everyday life. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Engeström, Y. (1987). Learning by Expanding. Helsinki: Orienta-Konsultit Oy.
Fernández, T. R. (2005). Sobre la Historia Natural del Sujeto y su lugar en una Historia de la Ciencia. A propósito de Robert J. Richards y el Romanticismo de Darwin. Estudios de Psicología, 26 (1), 67–104.
Frenkel-Brunswik, E. (1949). Intolerance of ambiguity as an emotional and perceptual personality variable. Journal of Personality, 18, 108–143.
Gergen, K. (1991). The saturated self, Dilemmas of identity in contemporary life. New York: Basic Books.
Gillespie, A. (2006). Becoming other: From social interaction to self-reflection. Greenwich, Ct.: Information Age Publishers, Inc.
González, A. (1997). Estructuras de la praxis. Ensayo de una filosofía primera. Madrid: Trotta.
Huntington, S. P. (1996). The clash of civilizations and the remaking of world order. New York: Simon & Schuster.
Knorr Cetina, K. (1999). Epistemic Cultures: How the sciences make knowledge. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Latour, B. (1987). Science in action. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Locke, J. (1689). Epistola de Tolerantia. http://oregonstate.edu/instruct/phl302/texts/locke/locke2/locke-t/locke_toleration.html.
Molenaar, P. C. M., & Valsiner, J. (2005). How generalization works through the single case: A simple idiographic process analysis of an individual psychotherapy case. International Journal of Idiographic Science, 1, 1–13. [www.valsiner.com]
Monod, J. (1970). Le hasard et la nécessité: essai sur la philosophie naturelle de la biologie modern. Paris: Seuil.
Mutis, A. (2002). Empresas y tribulaciones de Maqroll el gaviero. Madrid: Alfaguara.
Pettegree, A. (2005). Reformation and the culture of persuasion. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Popper, K. (1945). The Open Society and Its Enemies. (2 Vols). London: Routledge.
Richards, R. J. (1987). Darwin and the emergence of evolutionary theories of mind and behavior. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Richards, R. J. (2002). The Romantic conception of life. Science and Philosophy in the age of Goethe. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
Ricoeur, P. (1991). Narrative identity. In D. Wood (Ed.), On Paul Ricoeur: Narrative and Interpretation. Londres:Routledge.
Rosa, A., Castro, J., & Blanco, F. (2006). Otherness in historic situated self-experiences. In L. Simão and J. Valsiner (Eds.), Otherness in question: Labyrinths of the self. Greenwich, Ct: Information Age Publishers.
Rosa, A., & Monserrat, J. (2003). Cultural symbols, social discourses and the personal sense of actions. Paper presented at the Biennial Conference of the International Society for Theoretical Psychology. Istanbul.
Rose, N. (1996). Inventing Our Selves. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Salgado, J., & Gonçalves, M. (2007). The Dialogical Self: Social, Personal, and (Un)Conscious. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), The Cambridge Handbook of Socio-Cultural Psychology. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Sánchez, J. C., & Loredo, J. C. (2005). Psicologías para la evolución. Catálogo y crítica de los usos actuales de la Selección Orgánica. Estudios de Psicología 26 (1), 105–126.
Simão, L. M., & Valsiner, J. (Eds.), (2006). Otherness in question: Labyrinths of the self. Greenwich, CT: Information Age Publishers.
Slunecko, T., & Heingl, S. (2007). Language, Cognition, Subjectivity – A Dynamic Constitution. In J. Valsiner & A. Rosa (Eds.), The Cambridge Handbook of Socio-Cultural Psychology. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Smedslund, J. (1995). Psychologic: Common sense and the pseudoempirical. In J. A. Smith, R. Harré, and L. van Langenhove (Eds.), Rethinking psychology (pp. 196–206). London: Sage.
Valsiner, J. (1995). Editorial: Culture and Psychology. Culture & Psychology, 1, 1, 5–10.
Valsiner, J. (1997). Culture and the development of children's Action. 2nd ed. New York: Wiley.
Valsiner, J. (1998). The Guided Mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Valsiner, J. (2000). Culture and human development. London: Sage
Valsiner, J. (2001). The first six years: Culture's adventures in psychology. Culture & Psychology, 7, 1, 5–48.
Valsiner, J. (2004). Three years later: Culture in psychology – between social positioning and producing new knowledge. Culture & Psychology, 10, 1, 5–27.
Valsiner, J., & Abbey, E. (2006). Ambivalence in focus: Remembering the life and work of Else Frenkel-Brunswik. Estudios de Psicologia, 27, 1, 9–17.
Van Der Veer, R., & Valsiner, J. (1991). Understanding Vygotsky: A quest for synthesis. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1971). Psychology of art. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Wertsch, J. V. (1991). Voices of the Mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
White, H. (1973). Metahistory. Baltimore: The John Hopkins University Press.
Wolf, K. A. (Ed.), (1959). Georg Simmel, 1858–1918. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press.
Zittoun, T. (2006). Transitions: Symbolic resources in development. Greenwich, CT: Information Age Publishing, Inc.